JP2021159695A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To realize an efficient configuration for coping with a diversified performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a board including a first electrical component to which a performance control signal supplied from another board is inputted and a second electrical component to which the performance control signal is inputted in parallel with the first electrical component after being branched, and the first electrical component operates with a first voltage as a supply voltage and has a terminal for outputting a second voltage lower than the first voltage, and the second electrical component operates with the second voltage as a supply voltage.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine and relates to a technique that contributes to improving the performance of the gaming machine.

In the ball game machine and the rotary game machine, various effects are performed using a liquid crystal display screen, a speaker, an LED, an accessory, a vibrating body, a blower, and the like to liven up the game.
The following patent documents disclose techniques for controlling various effects.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-64693

However, in order to realize various effects, the number of substrates has increased, wiring has become complicated and difficult, and the power supply has become complicated due to them.
Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to propose a desirable configuration in a gaming machine in order to alleviate these problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has a first electric component to which an effect control signal supplied from another substrate is input, and a second electric component to which the effect control signal is branched and input in parallel with the first electric component. The first electric component has a component and a substrate provided with the component, and the first electric component operates with the first voltage as a power supply voltage and has a terminal for outputting a second voltage lower than the first voltage. Is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize an efficient configuration for responding to diversified effects.

It is a front side perspective view which shows the appearance of the gaming machine of embodiment which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board of the game machine of embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of the gaming machine of embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the example of the look-ahead notice production of an embodiment. It is a perspective view of the game machine of the embodiment in a state where the door is opened. It is a perspective view in the state which the inner frame of the gaming machine of embodiment is opened. It is explanatory drawing of the board arrangement on the back side of the game board of embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the substrate arrangement of the door and the inner frame of the gaming machine of embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the substrate arrangement of the inner frame of the gaming machine of embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of arrangement of various devices. It is a block diagram of the connection structure of a board. It is explanatory drawing of the power source system input / output about a power source board 300. It is a circuit diagram of the inner frame LED relay board 400. It is a circuit diagram of the inner frame LED relay board 400. It is a circuit diagram of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a circuit diagram of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a circuit diagram of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a circuit diagram of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a circuit diagram of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a circuit diagram of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a block diagram which shows the signal flow of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a block diagram which shows the signal flow of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is a circuit diagram of a relay board 550. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 630 on the side unit. It is a circuit diagram of the button LED connection board 640. It is a circuit diagram of the button LED board 660. It is a circuit diagram of the button LED board 660. It is a circuit diagram of the LED connection board 700. It is a circuit diagram of the LED connection board 700. It is a circuit diagram of the LED connection board 700. It is a circuit diagram of the LED connection board 700. It is a circuit diagram of the LED connection board 700. It is a circuit diagram of the LED connection board 700. It is a circuit diagram of the board back left relay board 720. It is a circuit diagram of a decorative substrate 740. It is a circuit diagram of a relay board 760. It is a circuit diagram of the LED board 780. It is a circuit diagram of the relay board 800 under the back of the board. It is a circuit diagram of a decorative substrate 820. It is explanatory drawing of the outline of transmission of the power supply voltage between boards. It is explanatory drawing of the example of a connector. It is explanatory drawing of the example of a connector. It is explanatory drawing of the example of a connector. It is explanatory drawing of the example of a connector. It is explanatory drawing of the example of a connector. It is explanatory drawing of the wiring path between boards. It is explanatory drawing of the transmission of the power supply voltage between boards. It is explanatory drawing of the power-source system of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is explanatory drawing of the power-source system of the front frame LED connection board 500. It is explanatory drawing of the transmission of the power supply voltage between boards. It is explanatory drawing of the branch of a buffer and a signal. It is explanatory drawing of the signal path of the side unit upper right LED board 600. It is explanatory drawing of the branch of a buffer and a signal. It is explanatory drawing of the branch of a buffer and a signal. It is a circuit diagram of the modification of the LED board 780.

Hereinafter, embodiments according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the accompanying drawings.
<1. Structure of gaming machine>
<2. Control configuration of gaming machines>
[2.1 Main control board]
[2.2 Production control board]
<3. Outline explanation of operation ＞
[3.1 Symbol variation display game]
[3.2 Game status]
[About 3.3 hits]
[3.4 Production]
<4. Opening and closing structure and board layout>
<5. Board connection configuration>
[5.1 Connection status of each board]
[5.2 Inner frame LED relay board 400]
[5.3 Front frame LED connection board 500]
[5.4 Relay board 550]
[5.5 Side unit upper right LED board 600]
[5.6 Side unit lower right LED board 620]
[5.7 LED board on side unit 630]
[5.8 Button LED Connection Board 640]
[5.9 Button LED Board 660]
[5.10 LED connection board 700]
[5.11 Board back left relay board 720]
[5.12 Decorative board 740]
[5.13 Relay board 760]
[5.14 LED board 780]
[5.15 Relay board under the back of the board 800]
[5.16 Decorative board 820]
<6. Explanation of attention configuration>
[6.1 Serial data signal between inner frame 2 and door 6]
[6.2 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (1)]
[6.3 Connector structure]
[6.4 Wiring route]
[6.5 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (Part 2)]
[6.6 Power supply path]
[6.7 Separation of power supply voltage system]
[6.8 Number of power supply lines and number of ground lines]
[6.9 Buffer and signal branching]
[6.10 Power supply by electrical parts]
[6.11 Others]

<1. Structure of gaming machine>

The structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the embodiment according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the front side showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1.
The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame member, a door member that can be opened and closed with respect to the frame member, and an exchange member that is replaceably attached to the frame member.
The pachinko gaming machine 1 described below includes an inner frame 2 as a configuration corresponding to a frame member, a door 6 as a configuration corresponding to a door member, and a game board 3 as a configuration corresponding to a replacement member.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as “game machine 1”), a frame-shaped inner frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and is attached to the back surface of the inner frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in the mounted game board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the inner frame 2. Have. Since the game board 3 can be exchangeably attached to and detached from the inner frame 2, it can be called an exchange member.
A door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

On the front side (player side) of the door 6, for example, the side unit 10 is formed as a decorative unit that surrounds all or part of the periphery of the game board 3.
The side unit 10 itself has a decorative shape that matches the theme of the gaming machine 1, and may be provided with directing members such as LEDs and accessories inside, so that the side unit 10 has a directing effect that conveys the atmosphere of the game to the player. Demonstrate. The side unit 10 is a unit that is replaceably attached to the door 6.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the door 6 with respect to the inner frame 2 is released. The door 6 can be opened to the front side, and if the door 6 is operated to the other side, the locked state of the inner frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the inner frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

On the lower side of the door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by an inner frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is arranged.
The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and payout of the game balls to the game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.
Further, the upper saucer unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The built-in lamp (button LED75) of the effect button 13 is lit during a predetermined input reception period to enable operation (input reception is possible), and a predetermined operation (press, repeated hit, long press, etc.) is performed while the built-in lamp is lit. It is possible to bring about a change in the production by doing.
Further, the upper saucer unit 8 includes a cross key 15a for a user such as a player or a hall staff to select various items and give a direction instruction, a decision button 15b for instructing a decision of a selection item, and the like. An operator is provided.

Further, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the inner frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. FIG. 1 shows only the two speakers 46 at the top of the inner frame 2.
The plurality of speakers 46 enable so-called stereo sound reproduction and more multi-channel sound reproduction for sounds related to the production.

Further, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (for example, LEDs for light effect by full-color LED: see FIG. 3) are provided at appropriate positions of the door 6 to exert a light effect by decorating the light. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light production) and the like as the decorative lamp 45 are provided around the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, on the periphery of the door 6 and in the side unit 10.

The configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG.
On the illustrated game board 3, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a. The four corners are non-gaming areas.

In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, symbols, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently used. A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 capable of variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), the middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and the right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It is provided.
The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects by images in addition to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol under the control of the effect control board 30 described later.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winded manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow of the game balls depends on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables the road to be distributed to the left and right.
In the present embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area 3a so that the flow paths of the game balls are formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. The game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and has a left flow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and a right flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either.

Further, the non-gaming area at the lower part of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and is a special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol) using a dot display. Display means) is provided.
Various function display units including the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are enlarged and shown in FIG.

In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the dot display. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and is decorated with various notice effects (effect images). The symbol variation display games are being executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c, which is composed of a dot display like the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, is arranged. There are five types of compound called compound: special symbols 1 and 2, display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, and status notification during the operation of the variable time shortening function (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a composite display device 38d, which is also composed of a dot display.
In this composite display device 38d, the number of rounds for notifying the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot is displayed by combining the lighting and extinguishing states of the four LEDs. For example, the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the big hit is notified by the combination of the lighting and extinguishing states of the four LEDs.
Further, in the composite display device 38d, as a normal symbol display, a normal symbol variation display game is executed by a variation display operation of the normal symbol represented by one LED.
Further, in the composite display device 38d, right-handed display is performed by three LEDs.

Below the center decoration 48 in FIG. 2, a normal variable winning device 41 having a starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) is provided inside. A detection sensor 34a (starting port sensor 34a, see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball is formed inside the starting port 34.
Further, the right flow path 3c is provided with a start port 35 (second special symbol start port: second start means) for opening / closing operation, and inside, a detection sensor 35a (start) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. Mouth sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) is formed.

The starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1", and in some cases, it is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated), and is configured as a winning rate fixed winning device having no starting opening opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). In the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b to the starting port 34 by the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail, a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. Is a configuration in which it is easy to enter (win a prize), whereas a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to enter.

The start port 35 starts the variable display operation of the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2" and, in some cases, abbreviated as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b. It is a winning opening according to the condition, and the winning area of the starting opening 35 is configured to be openable and closable in an open state in which a prize can be won and a closed state in which a prize cannot be won.

Further, two general winning openings 43 are provided on both sides of the ordinary variable winning device 41, and a general winning opening sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball is formed inside each of the two general winning openings 43. There is.
Further, in the area of the game board, a movable body accessory (not shown) that exerts a visual effect is arranged at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball.

Further, diagonally upward to the right of the normal variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c, a normal symbol start port 37 (third start) composed of a passage gate (specific passage area) through which the game ball can pass. Means) are provided. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the variable display operation of the normal symbol of the composite display device 38d, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball. It is formed. In this embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in both flow paths, respectively.

A special variable winning device 52 (special) configured so that the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the opening door 52b in the middle of the route from the normal symbol starting port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41. An electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the electric accessory).
Around the large winning opening 50, a guide portion 55 and a windmill 53 are provided to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows.
The game ball that has passed through the floating region between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 and passed through the right flow path 3c is guided in the direction of the big winning opening 50 by the guide portion 55. If the large winning opening 50 is open (the large winning opening 50 is open), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the gaming ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the starting port 34 The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in the starting port 34 of the normal variable winning device 41.
Further, the starting port 35 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is more advantageous than the normal state when it is in a gaming state accompanied by a state with electric support, which will be described later.

In the case of the present embodiment, what kind of striking method the player should take to obtain an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the game state accompanied by the "state without electric support" described later, the "left-handed" aiming at the game ball to pass the left flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous, and the "electric support" described later is considered to be advantageous. In the game state accompanied by the "presence state", the "right-handed" aiming at the game ball so as to pass through the right flow path 3c is considered to be advantageous.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a prize in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, each winning opening is promised. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, the starting port 34 or the starting port 35 is 3, the large winning opening 50 is 13, and the general winning opening 43 is 10) is the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3). It is supposed to be paid out from. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49.

Here, "winning" means a winning opening that does not have a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" occurs in the winning opening. It is treated as if it had been done. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Therefore, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, whether or not the game ball is detected by the winning detection switch. Regardless of this, it may be referred to as "winning" including the case where the game ball enters the winning opening.

<2. Control configuration of gaming machines>

A configuration (control configuration) for realizing game motion control of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment receives an effect control command from a main control board (main control means) 20 and a main control board 20 that collectively controls control (game operation control) related to the overall game operation, and produces the effect means. The effect control board 30 (effect control means) that controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the player, the payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls, and the external power supply (not shown). ) To generate and supply the power required for the gaming machine 1 (power supply control means (not shown)).
In FIG. 3, the power supply route to each part is omitted.

[2.1 Main control board]
The main control board 20 is equipped with a microcomputer incorporating a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 20a (main control CPU), and in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure, various data necessary for game operation control are stored in the main control board 20. It is equipped with a storage ROM (Read Only Memory) 20b (main control ROM) and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 20c (main control RAM) that functions as a work area or buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer as a whole. ..

Although not shown, the main control board 20 includes a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) for realizing a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle, and a time measurement function, and a main control. The interrupt controller circuit that exerts the interrupt enable / interrupt prohibit function such as timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal to the CPU 20a, and the main control that outputs a system reset signal by detecting power on / off or power failure. A reset circuit that can reset the CPU 20a, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of the control program, and prohibition of traveling outside the designated area that monitors whether the program is correctly executed within the preset address range. It also has an (IAT) circuit, a counter circuit for generating a certain range of random numbers in terms of hardware, and the like.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. The main control CPU 20a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, and uses the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). Obtain it and use the random number value for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

On the main control board 20, the start port sensor 34a for detecting the winning (ball winning) to the starting port 34, the starting port sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the starting port 35, and the passage of the normal symbol starting port 37 are detected. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a that detects the winning of the large winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a that detects the winning of the general winning opening 43, and the out opening 49 are discharged. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (out ball) is connected, and the main control board 20 is capable of receiving detection signals output from these. Based on the detection signals from each sensor, the main control board 20 can grasp which winning opening the game ball has entered.

Further, the main control board 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control board 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. .. Furthermore, a composite display device 38c is connected to the main control board 20, and it is possible to transmit control signals for controlling the hold number display and the status display.

Further, the composite display device 38d is connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 transmits control signals for controlling the display of the normal symbol display, the right-handed display, and the round display displayed on the composite display device 38d. It is said that it can be sent.

Further, the frame external centralized terminal board 21 is connected to the main control board 20, and the main control board 20 is predetermined with respect to the hall computer HC provided outside the gaming machine via the frame external centralized terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit game information (for example, jackpot information, prize ball number information, symbol change execution information, etc.).
The hall computer HC is an information processing device (computer device) for monitoring game information from the main control board 20 and comprehensively managing the operating status of the pachinko hall game machine.

Furthermore, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control board 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) related to payout is given to the payout control board 29. It is possible to send a payout control command) that specifies.

The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of payout control commands from the main control board 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmission of a status signal to the main control board 20, and the like. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out. It is possible to receive each detection signal of. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, the payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the stored state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9) and a full detection sensor 60 that detects the full state of the upper tray 9 with the game balls. , The front door opening sensor 61 (for example, a detection sensor that detects the open state of the door 6 and the inner frame 2) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control board 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the front door opening sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This status signal includes a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that at least the inner frame 2 is open, a supply shortage signal indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball payout device 19, and a prize ball. A counting error signal indicating that the payout is insufficient or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and the like are included, and various status signals can be transmitted. Based on these status signals, the main control board 20 determines the open state of the inner frame 2 (door opening error), whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (replenishment shortage error), and the upper tray 9. Monitor the full state (ball jam error), etc.

Furthermore, the launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and it is possible to transmit a permission signal for permitting the launch to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the permission signal from the payout control board 29, and operates the launch operation handle 15. The game ball launching operation is realized. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal is output from the payout control board 29 (launch permission signal ON state) and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the firing operation stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal is not output (launch permission signal OFF state), the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.
When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, the ball jamming signal is transmitted to the main control board 20 and the output of the firing permission signal to the firing control board 28 is stopped (launch permission signal OFF), and the upper tray 9 is used. It is designed to stop the launching operation until the full state of is resolved.
Further, the payout control board 29 outputs a launch permission signal to the launch control board 28 on condition that the launch permission is instructed by the main control board 20.

Here, the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are connected to the main control board 20, and the detection signals from these switches can be received.

The RAM clear switch 98 is, for example, a push button type switch for instructing and inputting to initialize a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.
The setting key switch 94 is a key switch for switching to the setting change mode (at the time of ON operation) by inserting the setting key possessed by the hall staff at the time of turning on the power and performing the ON / OFF operation.
Here, the setting change mode is a mode in which the setting value Ve can be changed. The set value Ve is a value indicating a stage regarding the winning probability of whether or not to win the gaming state advantageous to the player.

The RAM clear switch 98 is turned ON / OFF in response to the operation of the RAM clear button provided so as to be operable in the state where the inner frame 2 is open.
Further, the setting key switch 94 is provided with a key cylinder in which the above-mentioned setting key can be inserted and removed, and is turned on by rotating the setting key inserted in the key cylinder in the forward direction. It is turned off by being rotated in the opposite direction from the ON state.
The key cylinder is provided so that the operation can be performed by inserting the setting key with the inner frame 2 open. The key cylinder functions as an operator that can be operated by inserting the setting key.

In this example, the above RAM clear button is also used for the operation of changing the set value Ve. Specifically, the RAM clear button also functions as an operator for sequentially advancing the set value Ve.

The RAM clear switch 98 and the setting key switch 94 are provided at appropriate positions inside the gaming machine 1. For example, it is arranged on the main control board 20.

A setting / performance indicator 97 is connected to the main control board 20.
The setting / performance display 97 is configured to include, for example, a 7-segment display, and functions as a display means capable of displaying a set value Ve and performance information (described later). The setting / performance indicator 97 is mounted at a position on the main control board 20 that is easily visible, for example.
The main control board 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying the set value Ve and performance information to the setting / performance display 97.

Here, the set value Ve mainly defines the lottery probability (winning probability) of at least a big hit (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). Therefore, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the winning probability (setting 1 is the lowest winning probability, and thereafter, the winning probability increases in ascending order of the set value), which is advantageous to the player. There is. In other words, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the so-called "machine discount (ball output rate, PAYOUT rate)", which is advantageous for the player.
In this way, the set value Ve is a value that defines the jackpot winning probability, machine discount, etc., and means a value related to the likelihood of a specific event such as a profit state acting on the player. In the present embodiment, the advantage related to the game is defined according to each set value Ve.

In this example, it is assumed that there are 6 stages (advantage stages) of the set value Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, it is assumed that the range that can be used according to the rules of the set value Ve (hereinafter referred to as "usable range Re") is the range of "1" to "6".
Under this premise, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only a part of the set values Ve among the set values Ve that can be used according to the rules. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example uses only three values of, for example, "1", "2", and "6" among the set values Ve of "1" to "6" in the usable range Re. do. In other words, the specification is limited to 3 stages instead of 6 stages, which is the maximum stage in the rules, regarding the winning probability.
Hereinafter, the range of the set value Ve actually used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, specifically, the range of the set value Ve actually used among the set value Ve within the usable range Re (“1” in the above example. "The range of" 2 "and" 6 ") is referred to as" the range of use Ru ".

The set value Ve is set exclusively by the hall staff such as the hall clerk based on the sales strategy of the hall (game store). When there are a plurality of types of jackpots, it is possible to appropriately determine which jackpot winning probability is to be changed according to the set value Ve, and the target jackpot type. For example, if there are three types of jackpots 1-3, the higher the set value Ve, the higher the probability of winning all of the jackpots 1-3, or the jackpots 1-3. The total winning probability may be increased. In addition, the probability of winning some big hits may be increased. For example, only the winning probability of the jackpots 1 and 2 may be increased, and the winning probability of the jackpot 3 may be set to a constant winning probability with all the set values Ve.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In order to change the set value Ve, in this example, the setting key switch 94 is turned on (operated to the setting change mode side) while the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and the inner frame 2 is released. The power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed (the RAM clear switch 98 is ON). Then, the current set value Ve is displayed on the setting / performance indicator 97, and the mode shifts to the "setting change mode" in which the set value Ve (1, 2, 6 in this example) can be changed.

In this example, the determination as to whether or not to shift to the setting change mode is performed in the main control side main process described later (see step S104 in FIG. 8). When the above-mentioned operating conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, the process for changing the setting is executed accordingly.

After the transition to the setting change mode, when the RAM clear button that functions as the setting value Ve change operator is turned on, the current display value of the setting / performance indicator 97 changes to "1 → 2 → 6 → 1 → 1 →". It can be switched to the circulation type within the range of use Ru like "2 → 6 → ...". Then, when the desired set value Ve is reached, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the set value Ve is determined, and the information of the determined set value Ve is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.
When the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated and the display of the setting / performance indicator 97 is cleared.
When the setting change mode ends, the state shifts to the state where the game progress is allowed.

(About performance display)
The main control board 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying predetermined performance information to the setting / performance display 97.
Performance information is information that pachinko halls and related agencies want to confirm, and typical examples are information on the presence or absence of illegal prize balls such as excess prize balls for game machine 1 and information on the original ball ejection performance of game machine 1. Is. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game when the player plays the game, unlike the advance notice effect.

Therefore, the setting / performance indicator 97 is provided inside the gaming machine 1, for example, on the main control board 20, the payout control board 29, the launch control board 28, the relay board, the effect control board 30, and the board case (protecting the board). A protective cover) or the like is provided at a position where the display information can be visually recognized when the inner frame 2 is opened.

Here, the following information can be specifically adopted as the performance information.

(1) The total number of payouts paid out by winning in the specific state (total number of prize balls in the specific state: α) is the total number of out balls discharged from the out port 49 in the specific state (out in the specific state). Information (specific ratio information) based on the value (α / β) divided by the number: β) can be adopted as the performance information.
The above "total number of payouts" is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out when winning a prize in the winning openings (starting opening 34, starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 50). .. In the case of the present embodiment, the starting port 34 or the starting port 35 is 3, the large winning opening 50 is 13, and the general winning opening 43 is 10.
In addition, which state is to be adopted as the specific state can be appropriately determined depending on what kind of state the performance information is to be grasped. In the case of the present embodiment, any of the normal state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, the probability variation state, and the jackpot game can be adopted. Further, a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, it is a normal state and a probable change state, all game states except during a hit game, and the type to be measured can be appropriately determined.
Further, as the period in the specific state, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is either a low probability state or a high probability state may be adopted.
Further, the total number of payouts may be one or a plurality of specific winning openings excluded from the measurement target (total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, the one excluding the large winning opening 50 from the measurement target may be used as the total number of payouts.

(2) In addition, only any one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings, and the total number of out balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (number of payouts in the normal state) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (number of outs in the normal state) are measured in real time, and the number of payouts in the normal state is the number of outs in the normal state. The value obtained by multiplying the value divided by is multiplied by 100 (the value calculated by the number of payouts in normal time / the number of outs in normal time x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as "normal time ratio information"). The displayed value at this time shall be a value rounded off to the first decimal place.
Therefore, each data of the number of payouts in the normal time, the number of outs in the normal time, and the normal time ratio information is the corresponding area of the main control RAM 20c (specific medium total prize ball number storage area, specific medium out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area). It is designed to be stored (memorized) in each. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. This specified number is not the total number of out balls in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during the total gaming state (including during the winning game) (hereinafter referred to as "total number of out balls"). The total number of outs is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (all state outs storage area) of the main control RAM 20c. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the specific medium total prize ball number storage area, the specific medium out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the all state out number storage area are abbreviated as "measurement information storage area".

Then, the normal time ratio information at the end time is stored in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the main control RAM 20c (stores the normal time ratio information this time), and then the measurement information storage area (number of payouts during normal time, normal time). After clearing the number of outs and the number of outs in all states), the measurement is started again (the number of payouts in normal time, the number of outs in normal time, the ratio information in normal time, and the number of out balls in all states are started to be measured). Then, the setting / performance display 97 displays the previous normal time ratio information (measurement history information) and the normal time ratio information currently being measured. In addition to the previous information, the history of the previous two times or the previous time (three times before) may be displayed so that the information up to the previous time can be appropriately determined.

Here, in the case of this example, the set value Ve and the performance information are selectively displayed on the setting / performance display 97. Specifically, in this example, setting changes and setting confirmations are performed only at startup when the power is turned on, so settings are made according to the transition to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after startup when the power is turned on. The set value Ve is displayed on the performance display 97, and the performance information is displayed after the setting change and the setting confirmation are completed.
The configuration is not limited to displaying the set value Ve and the performance information on a common display, and it is also possible to display the set value Ve and the performance information on separate displays. In that case, the set value Ve and the performance information may be displayed in parallel.

(Direction control command)
The main control board 20 is capable of transmitting various effect control commands including information on the special symbol variation display game, information on errors, and the like to the effect control board 30 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent fraud such as goto behavior, the main control board 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control board 30, and the signal from the effect control board 30 cannot be received. It has become.

Here, the effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, the effect control command of MODE Bit7 is ON, and Bit7 of EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the main control CPU 20a sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control board 30, and the first strobe signal after a lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. To send. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the main control CPU 20a for a predetermined period during which the effect control CPU 30a can reliably receive the command.

[2.2 Production control board]
The effect control board 30 is equipped with a microprocessor having a built-in effect control CPU 30a, an effect control ROM 30b that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a micro effect control RAM 30c that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a computer, and is also provided with an acoustic control unit (sound source IC), an RTC (Real Time Clock) function unit, a counter circuit, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, a WDT circuit, and the like to control the overall production operation.

The effect control CPU 30a performs arithmetic processing for various effect operations and controls of each effect means based on the effect control program and the effect control command received from the main control unit 20. In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect means are a liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device 36M, sub liquid crystal display device 36S), an optical display device 45a, a sound generator 46a, and a movable device (not shown). It becomes a physical accessory.

The effect control ROM 30b stores a control program for the effect operation by the effect control CPU 30a and various data necessary for the effect control.
The effect control RAM 30c is used as a work area used by the effect control CPU 30a for various arithmetic processing, a table data area, a buffer area for various input / output data and processing data, and the like.
The effect control board 30 is configured to include, for example, a one-chip microcomputer and its peripheral circuits, but various configurations of the effect control board 30 can be considered. For example, in addition to a microcomputer, an interface circuit with each part, a random number generation circuit for generating lottery random numbers for production, a CTC for various time counting, a watchdog timer (WDT) circuit, and an interrupt signal to the production control CPU 30a. In some cases, an interrupt controller circuit or the like is provided.

The main roles of the effect control board 30 are reception of effect control commands from the main control unit 20, selection and determination of effects based on the effect control commands, display control of the liquid crystal display device 36 (display data supply), and sound generator 46a. Voice output control, light emission control of the light display device 45a (LED), operation control of the movable body accessory (drive control of the movable body accessory motor 80c), and the like.

Since the effect control board 30 also has a function as a control device for the liquid crystal display device 36, the effect control board 30 also has functions as a so-called VDP (Video Display Processor), an image ROM, and a VRAM (Video RAM). The effect control CPU 30a is also provided, and also functions as a liquid crystal control unit.
VDP refers to a function that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing.
The image ROM refers to a memory in which image data (effect image data) for which VDP performs image development processing is stored.
The VRAM is an image memory area that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP.

With these configurations, the effect control board 30 generates various image data based on commands from the main control unit 20 and outputs the various image data to the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S. As a result, various effects images are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 36M and the sub liquid crystal display device 36S.
Here, the "liquid crystal display device 36" shown in FIG. 2 is a "main liquid crystal display device 36M". The sub-liquid crystal display device 36S is not shown in FIG.

Further, the effect control board 30 has an acoustic control unit (for example, the sound controller 230 in FIG. 4) for the sound generator 46a including the plurality of speakers 46, and the acoustic signal output by the acoustic control unit is amplified by the amplifier unit 46d. Is supplied to the speaker 46. Although the sound controller 230 as the sound control unit will be described as being built in the effect control board 30, the sound control unit may use a sound source IC separate from the effect control board 30.
Further, the effect control board 30 includes a lamp driver unit 45d that functions as an optical display control unit for an optical display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs, and a movable body accessory motor that operates a movable body (not shown). A motor driver unit 80d (motor drive circuit) that functions as a drive control unit for the 80c is connected. The effect control board 30 gives instructions to the lamp driver unit 45d and the motor driver unit 80d to control the light display operation by the light display device 45a and the operation of the movable accessory motor 80c.

An origin switch 81 and a position detection sensor 82 for monitoring the operation of the movable body accessory are also connected to the effect control board 30.
The origin switch 81 is composed of, for example, a photo interrupter or the like, and detects whether or not the movable body accessory motor 80c is at the origin position. The origin position is, for example, a position where the movable body does not normally appear on the board surface of FIG. The effect control board 30 can determine whether or not the movable body accessory motor 80c is at the origin position based on the detection information of the origin switch 81.
Further, the effect control board 30 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82. Further, the effect control board 30 monitors a defect in the operation of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82, and if a defect occurs, detects this as an error.

Further, the effect button 13, the cross key 15a, and the switch of the decision button 15b shown as the operation unit 17 in the drawing, that is, the operation detection switch of the effect button 13, the cross key 15a, and the decision button 15b are connected to the effect control board 30. The effect control board 30 is capable of receiving operation detection signals from the effect button 13, the cross key 15a, and the decision button 15b, respectively.

Further, the effect control board 30 is provided with a handle sensor 83 (touch sensor) for detecting whether or not the firing operation handle 15 shown in FIG. 1 is touched by a user such as a player. The effect control board 30 can determine whether or not the firing operation handle 15 is touched by the user based on the detection information of the handle sensor 83.

The effect control board 30 is required by selecting (determining) an effect pattern by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20. By controlling various production means at the timing, the desired production is produced. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, the lighting and blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display operation and By developing the notice production etc. in chronological order, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

Here, regarding the effect control command, the effect control board 30 (effect control CPU 30a) generates an interrupt process based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal transmitted by the main control unit 20 (main control CPU 20a), and receives and analyzes the interrupt process. conduct. Specifically, the effect control CPU 30a executes a control program for command reception interruption processing based on the above-mentioned input of the strobe signal, acquires an effect control command in the interrupt processing realized by the control program, and obtains the effect control command. Perform analysis.
At this time, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of the strobe signal, the effect control CPU 30a may execute interrupt processing (periodically executed timer interrupt processing) based on another interrupt. The command reception interrupt processing is performed by interrupting the processing, and the command reception interrupt processing is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Outline explanation of operation ＞
[3.1 Symbol variation display game]
Next, an outline of the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 realized by the control configuration (FIG. 3) as described above will be described.
First, a symbol variation display game will be described.

(Special symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a random number is generated on the main control board 20 based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, a game ball entering (winning) a starting port 34 or a starting port 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control board 20 variablely displays the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variation display game, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, specializes the result. Derived display is performed on the symbol display device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on the condition that the game ball enters the starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started, while the other On the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the starting port 35. .. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, in other cases, in a predetermined "missing" mode, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The variable display game is referred to as a "special symbol variable display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol". The "special symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

(Decorative pattern variation display game)
Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variable display game is started, a decorative symbol (directive game symbol) is variablely displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 36M, and the decorative symbol variable display game is started. Along with this, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the main liquid crystal display device 36M reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big hit" (when the jackpot lottery result is "big hit"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is "7"), the main liquid crystal display device 36M is displayed with "left", "middle", and "middle". In each display area of "right", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each display area of "left", "middle", and "right", the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and "7". 7 ”is displayed) and the display is stopped.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A special game state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening door 52b allows the opening time of the winning opening to elapse until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example), or the number of game balls that have won the winning opening (big winning opening). A predetermined number of winning balls to 50) (maximum number of winning balls: maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9) The "round game", in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the number of winnings is reached, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied, is performed by a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (for example, a maximum of 16). Round) Repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening effect for notifying that the jackpot has started is performed first, and after the opening effect is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. Then, after the end of the specified number of rounds, an ending effect is performed to notify that the jackpot is finished, and the jackpot game is finished by this.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control board 20 starts, specifically, based on the game ball entering (winning) the starting port 34 or the starting port 35. On the condition that the game ball is detected by the mouth sensor 34a or the starting mouth sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, a lottery is made to determine whether the game is a "big hit" or a "missing"'winning lottery. Includes'(winning type lottery)'and'design lottery (winning type (winning type) lottery)' to draw the big hit type if it is a "big hit" and the missed type if it is "missing". A big hit lottery is performed (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery may be omitted because it is not necessary to perform a type lottery for the loss), and based on the lottery result information, the variation pattern of the special symbol and the winning type can be selected. A special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a "special stop symbol") to be finally stopped and displayed is determined accordingly.

Then, the main control board 20 issues a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) as an effect control command for specifying the processing state. It is transmitted to the effect control board 30 side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control board 30. In the present embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control board 30 in order to enrich the variation of the effect. It has become like.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect" described later) is generated. In detail, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "missing fluctuation pattern" in the case of a miss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. These fluctuation patterns include, for example, a'reach fluctuation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of the reach effect described later, a'normal fluctuation pattern'that does not specify the occurrence of the reach effect, and the occurrence (overlap occurrence) of the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as a specified'pseudo-ream reach variation pattern', a'pseudo-ream normal variation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of a pseudo-ream effect, and does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect. In addition, in order to secure the production time of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the variation pattern that specifies the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect is usually set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control board 30 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control board 20. The content of the production to be developed (the production scenario such as the advance notice production) and the decorative design to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop design) are determined, and the decorative design is variablely displayed and decorated according to the time schedule based on the variable pattern of the special design. Run the symbol variation display game. As a result, the decorative symbol by the main liquid crystal display device 36M is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game. The period in the middle is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control board 30 controls the main liquid crystal display device 36M, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect), sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45, LED, etc. are realized on the main liquid crystal display device 36M.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games".

(Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control board 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the composite display device 38d to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is displayed by a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol of the composite display device 38d is in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state, or "○". Of the LEDs expressing "x" and "x", the LED on the "○" side is lit) to stop and display.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 is opened in an inverted "C" shape and the starting port 35 is opened or opened. The expanded state makes it easier for the game ball to flow in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the number of game balls that the opening time of the starting port 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or the starting port 35 is won by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41. The winning area is opened or expanded until a predetermined number (for example, 4) is reached, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the starting port 35 is closed, and the like is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 2 times). It is supposed to be repeated.

(About hold)
Here, in the present embodiment, the start port 34, the start port 35, or the normal symbol start port 37 is awarded during the special / decorative symbol change display game, the normal symbol change display game, the big hit game, or the public electric open game. Is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the start port sensor 34a, the start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this is displayed in a variable manner. As the data related to the right to start the game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, a maximum of 4), which is a predetermined upper limit, is reserved and stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation, or the game ball related to the reserved data, is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) or a liquid crystal display device 36 (main liquid crystal display device 36M or sub liquid crystal display device) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 is provided. The hold display provided as an icon image is lit and displayed on the screen according to 36S).

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation hold balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are held and stored in the corresponding storage area of the main control RAM 20c, and are held as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the normal symbol is confirmed. do. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

[3.2 Game status]
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present embodiment, first, various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute and control at least four types of gaming states: a normal state, a time saving state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state. These game states are distinguished by the presence or absence of a jackpot lottery probability state (low probability state, high probability state) and an electric chew support state (privilege game) (with electric support, without electric support).

The "electric chew support state" is a normal state in which the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (at least one of the opening time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of times of opening the movable wing piece 47) in the normal variable opening game is Refers to the "open extension state" that is more extended than. When the open extension state occurs, the open operation period of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds in the normal state (under the non-open extension state) to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing thereof is, for example, It is extended from 1 time in normal time to 2 to 3 times.

In the case of the present embodiment, under the electric chew support state, the lottery probability per auxiliary varies from a low probability (for example, 1/256) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) (usually). Along with the occurrence of the figure probability fluctuation state, the'normal symbol time reduction state'that shortens the average time (normal symbol fluctuation display operation time) required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game occurs (for example, from 10 seconds). It is shortened to 1 second). Therefore, when the electric chew support state occurs, the normal electric opening game frequently occurs, and the operating rate is improved (high base state) in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Hereinafter, the state under the electric chew support state is abbreviated as "with electric support", and the case where it is not is abbreviated as "without electric support".

In the present embodiment, the "normal state" means that the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability), and a gaming state without electric support (low probability + no electric support). To tell.

In the "time saving state", the jackpot lottery probability is as low as the normal state, but the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation time) is higher than the normal state. It is a game state in which a'special symbol time reduction state'is generated and the electric chew support state is set. In other words, during the time saving state, it becomes "low probability + with electric support + special symbol time saving state".

The "latent probability state" is a "special symbol probability change state" in which the jackpot lottery probability fluctuates to a high probability (for example, 1 / 39.9) higher than the above low probability, and is a gaming state without electric support (high). Probability + no electric support).

The "probability change state" refers to a game state in which the jackpot lottery probability is as high as the latent probability state, but a special symbol time reduction state and an electric chew support state occur. In other words, during the probability change state, it becomes "high probability + with electric support + special symbol time saving state".

Regarding the game state, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability, when the game state is "normal state" and "time saving state", at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability state", and the game state is "latent state" and "probability change". In the case of "state", at least the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". During the big hit, a big hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but the big hit lottery probability and the presence / absence of the electric support are placed under the same low probability / no electric support game state as the above normal state.

[About 3.3 hits]
Next, the "hit" in the gaming machine 1 will be described.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big hit lottery (winning lottery) is performed for a plurality of types of hits. In the case of this example, the hit type includes, for example, each jackpot belonging to the jackpot type, for example, "normal 4R", "normal 6R", "probability variation 6R", and "probability variation 10R".
The notation of "R" means the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds).

The jackpot type is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or the game ball is displayed. A game that operates when a specific area in the winning opening is passed.

In the above probability variation state, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times: the specified number of STs) without winning the jackpot type, the high probability state is terminated and the probability shifts to a low probability. , So-called "number-cutting probability change machine (ST machine)", and when the specified number of ST times is completed, the game shifts to the normal state from the next game. However, it may be a type of "general probability change machine" that continues until the next big hit is won.

The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game may be the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). It may be the number of executions of either one (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game 2). Further, the number of times of the time saving state is not limited to 60 times or 100 times, and can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In addition, there is no particular limitation on what kind of hit is provided, and it can be appropriately determined.

Here, in this example, a plurality of types are provided for "missing" as well as the jackpot type. Specifically, there are three types of "Wrong Answer 1", "Wrong Answer 2", and "Wrong Answer 3".
As described above, when the result of the winning lottery is "missing", the lottery of the losing type is performed in the symbol lottery.

[3.4 Production]
(Direction mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for displaying an effect related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, a normal effect mode, a time-saving effect mode, a latent effect mode, and a probabilistic effect mode are provided corresponding to each of the normal state, the time-saving state, the latent state, and the probabilistic state. In each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern is displayed by different background effects so that the player can grasp what kind of game state he / she is currently staying in. It has become.

The effect control board 30 (effect control CPU 30a) has a function unit (effect state shift control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control board 30 (effect control CPU 30a) includes specific effect control commands sent from the main control board 20 (main control CPU 20a), specifically, game state information managed on the main control board 20 side. Based on the effect control command, the current game state can be grasped and the transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes can be performed while maintaining consistency with the game state managed on the main control board 20 side. Specific effect control commands as described above include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a game state designation command sent when a change occurs in the game state, and the like.

(Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control board 30 is variously related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result based on the content of the effect control command from the main control board 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled. Such a notice effect suggests (notices) the degree of expectation (hereinafter referred to as "winning expectation") of whether or not a player has won the winning type, and serves as a "fanning effect" to fuel the player's sense of expectation of winning. work. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", and "look-ahead notice production". The effect control board 30 functions as a notice effect control means capable of executing (appearing) and controlling these effects.

The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode with a reach state (variation display mode with a reach state: reach variation pattern), and specifically, the final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. A mode of production. Reach effects include multiple types of reach effects associated with winning expectations. For example, there are cases where the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect appears. Such a reach production is called a "super reach production". Many of these "super reach" have a relatively longer production time (variable time) than the normal reach in order to fuel the expectation of winning. In addition, normal reach and super reach include multiple types of reach effects. In this example, the super reach includes a plurality of types of reach effects of super reach 1, 2, 3, and 4, and the winning expectation of these super reach 1 to 4 is "super reach 1 <super reach 2 <super". It has a relationship of "reach 3 <super reach 4".

The "pseudo-continuous effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo-continuous variation) of the decorative symbol, and the "pseudo-continuous variation" is one of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol variation display game. It refers to a variable display mode in which a display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times, such as temporarily setting a part or all of them in a temporarily stopped state and executing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporarily stopped state. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)" described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the occurrence rate (appearance rate) of such a "pseudo-ream" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. It is easy to select a production to fuel expectations such as reach.

The "look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as "look-ahead notice" or "look-ahead effect") is based on the result of the look-ahead judgment and before the variable display of the symbol to be judged is performed. It means an effect of notifying the possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. The "advantageous state" means an advantageous state for the player.
Specifically, the look-ahead effect of this example is mainly for holding display of operation-holding balls (undigested operation-holding balls) that have not yet been used for execution of the symbol variation display game (variation display operation of special symbols). It is performed in an effect mode that can notify the winning expectation in advance before the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game by using the mode and the background effect of the symbol variation display game executed earlier. .. In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "SU (step-up) notice effect", "timer notice effect", "revival effect", and "premier notice effect" are performed. It occurs and the game content is getting excited.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the "pending change notice effect" as an example of the pre-reading notice effect will be described.
In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the upper display area in the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 36M, a display area for displaying a decorative symbol variable display game (a variable display effect for decorative symbols and a notice effect are displayed). A display area (display area) is provided, and a special display area 76 (hold display units a1 to d1) for displaying the number of operation-holding balls on the special symbol 1 side is provided in the lower display area of the screen. A hold display area 77 (hold display units a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the symbol 2 side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, the fact is notified by a predetermined holding display mode. In FIG. 5, the presence or absence of the operation holding ball is in the lit state (with the operation holding ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or in the off state (without the operation holding ball: the broken line circle in the figure). An example is shown in which information on the number of balls on hold is notified.

The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation hold ball (hold display) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each hold display area 76, 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is all the operations in the hold display. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of the present embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation-holding ball is generated, the pre-reading determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball generated this time) are generated from the main control board 20. A "hold addition command" for designating the above is transmitted to the effect control board 30 (see steps S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 28).
In the case of the present embodiment, the hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the hold addition command makes it possible to specify the data on the upper byte side that can specify the number of operation hold balls at the time of the look-ahead determination and the look-ahead judgment information. It is composed of low-order byte side data.

Here, as understood from the above description, in the present embodiment, as a look-ahead determination for the reserved ball, based on the fact that a prize is generated in the starting port 34 or the starting port 35 and a new reserved ball is generated. , A big hit lottery will be held for the symbol variation display game related to the reserved ball. As will be described later, the main control board 20 holds and stores information representing the result of the jackpot lottery performed as such a look-ahead determination in the corresponding storage area of the main control RAM 20c.
The information of the jackpot lottery result obtained at the time of the look-ahead determination is used for selecting (lottery) the symbol variation pattern in the symbol variation display game, and can be paraphrased as "variation pattern selection information". Therefore, it can be said that the main control board 20 performs the look-ahead determination and holds and stores the "variation pattern selection information" obtained as a result in a predetermined area of the main control RAM 20c.

When the effect control board 30 receives the hold addition command transmitted by the main control board 20, the effect control board 30 receives the "look-ahead advance notice effect" as a part of the display control process related to the hold display based on the look-ahead determination information included therein. Performs production control processing related to. Specifically, a "look-ahead notice lottery" is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed, and if this is won, the look-ahead notice effect is displayed.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is specifically a big hit lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game on the main control board 20. This is game information obtained by pre-reading and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation. That is, this information includes at least information that pre-reads the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation (pre-reading winning information), and other information that pre-reads the symbol lottery result (pre-reading symbol information) and fluctuation at the start of fluctuation. Information for which the pattern is pre-read-determined (pre-reading fluctuation pattern information) can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control board 30 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified by the pre-reading notice.
In this example, it is assumed that the hold addition command includes the look-ahead winning information, the look-ahead symbol information, and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information.

It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball is generated must be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" itself obtained when the operation-holding ball is actually subjected to the fluctuation display operation. There is no. For example, if the case where the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "super reach 1" is typically described, in this case, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is called "super reach 1". It is possible to specify that it is not the type of reach production itself, but the "super reach type" that is the gist of the effect.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the look-ahead notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example, a normal hold display. A "hold display change" that can change from white (normal hold display mode) to hold display (special hold display mode) with blue, green, red, and Danger patterns (or special colors and patterns such as rainbow colors) of the notice display. A look-ahead notice effect (also called "pending change notice") of "system" is performed.
FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in blue, green, red, and the Danger pattern means that the expectation of winning is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the hold icon of the Danger pattern has an extremely high expectation of winning a big hit. It is a premium hold icon to be displayed.

(Direction means)
Various effects in the game machine 1 are expressed by the effect means provided in the game machine 1. The directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device (light display device 45a: Light effect means), sound generator such as speaker 46 (sound generator 46a: sound effect means), effect display device (display means) such as main liquid crystal display device 36M and sub liquid crystal display device 36S, contact with operator's body Typical examples are a pressurizing device that transmits pressure, a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to a player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<4. Opening and closing structure and board layout>

The configuration of FIG. 3 described above is actually realized via a plurality of substrates. In the following, some of the boards mounted on the gaming machine 1 will be extracted and their arrangement will be described. The opening / closing structure of the gaming machine 1 will also be described for the mounting position of the substrate.

FIG. 5 shows a state in which the door 6 is opened.
When the door 6 is opened, the inner frame 2 and the game board 3 mounted on the inner frame 2 are directly exposed.
The substrate arranged on the door 6 and the substrate arranged on the inner frame 2 are wired and connected by a harness as a transmission line H8.

Further, the gaming machine 1 is configured so that the inner frame 2 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 4.
FIG. 6 shows a state in which the inner frame 2 is opened. When the inner frame 2 is opened, the game board 3 attached to the inner frame 2 is also released from the outer frame 4. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the back cover 18 attached to the position on the back side of the game board 3 is visible. Although the game board 3 is not shown in FIG. 6, when the back cover 18 is removed (opened), the back side of the game board 3 is exposed. Actually, since the back cover 18 is transparent or translucent, the back side of the game board 3 can be visually recognized in the state of FIG.
The game board 3 can be further removed from the inner frame 2.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 4, an inner frame 2 attached to the outer frame 4, a gaming board 3 attached to the inner frame 2, and the front side of the gaming board 3 and the inner frame 2. It is composed of a door 6 located. Various boards are attached to any of the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6.

FIG. 7 shows the positions of some of the boards attached to the game board 3. Note that FIG. 7 shows a substrate mounted on the back side of the game area 3a when the game board 3 is viewed from the back side. Therefore, the right side of the figure is the left side when the game board 3 is viewed from the front side. In the figure, the outline of the frame of the game board 3 is shown by a dotted chain line for reference of the position.

As shown in the figure, on the back side of the game board 3, the effect control board 30 is arranged slightly above the center, and the main control board 20 is arranged below the effect control board 30. Further, the liquid crystal control board 901 is arranged so as to overlap the effect control board 30, and the ROM board 902 and the liquid crystal interface board 903 are arranged in the vicinity thereof.

The LED connection board 700 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the game board 3, and the power supply module board 904 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion thereof.
Further, the upper connection board 905 is arranged above the game board 3.

A relay board 760, a decorative board 740, a board back left relay board 720, a game board connection board 906, a board back bottom relay board 800, and a frame LED relay board 840 are arranged in the vicinity of the main control board 20.

Further, as a substrate to be attached on a movable body accessory (not shown) attached to the game board, there are LED substrates 780 and 790 and a decorative substrate 820.

FIG. 8 shows some of the boards attached to the door 6 in a state where their positions are viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1. As a configuration inside the gaming machine 1, the door 6, the effect button 13, the firing operation handle 15, and the upper speaker 46 are shown by a chain line as a guideline for the position.

A relay board 550 is provided above the door 6.
Similarly, the side unit upper LED board 630 is provided above the door 6, the side unit upper right LED board 600 is provided at the upper right of the door 6, and the side unit lower right LED board 620 is provided below the side unit upper right LED board 600. The side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit lower right LED board 620, and the side unit upper LED board 630 are mounted in the side unit 10 (see FIG. 1), and the side unit 10 is attached to the door 6 of each board. By mounting the LED, the position shown in FIG. 8 is obtained.

The frame left LED board 907 is arranged on the upper left side of the door 6, and the frame left lower LED board 908 is arranged below the frame left LED board 907.
Further, the front frame LED connection board 500 is arranged below the door 6.
Further, the button LED connection board 640 is arranged at the lower right, and the button LED board 660 is arranged inside the effect button 13.

Next, the position of the substrate attached to the inner frame 2 will be described. FIG. 9 is a view of the gaming machine 1 as viewed from the back. The back side of the gaming machine 1 is mostly protected by a transparent or translucent back cover 18.
The power supply board 300 and the payout control board 29 are arranged in the front-rear direction below the back side.
Further, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is attached to the lower right side when viewed from the back side.

FIG. 10 shows the arrangement positions of various devices arranged on the door 6 and the game board 3. The contours of the game board 3 and the door 6 are shown by a long-dotted chain line as a guide for the position of each device.

In FIG. 10, the devices provided in the side unit 10 of the door 6 include a side unit device 101, a side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102, a side unit lower right movable object motor 103, and a side unit upper right movable object motor 104. , Side unit upper right movable object solenoid 105, blower 106, photocoupler PC1F, PC2F, PC3F are arranged at the positions shown in the drawings. The photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are attached to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.

Further, as devices attached to the game board 3 in FIG. 10, the lower back movable object upper position detection switch 120, the lower back movable object right position detection switch 121, the distribution position detection switch 122, the lower front movable object position detection switch 123, and the lower Front movable object motor 124, lower back movable object left position detection switch 125, lower back movable object left motor 126, lower back movable object lower right position detection switch 127, lower back movable object lower left position detection switch 128, upper movable object left Motor 129, upper movable object left position detection switch 130, left movable object motor 131, upper movable object position detection switch 132, upper movable object right motor 133, left movable object position detection switch 134, lower back movable object right motor 135. Each is arranged at the position shown in the figure.

The substrates shown in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 above are only a part of the substrates provided in the gaming machine 1. In particular, the main substrates targeted in the following description are illustrated.
Further, the device shown in FIG. 10 is only a part of the devices provided in the gaming machine 1.

<5. Board connection configuration>
[5.1 Connection status of each board]

The connection configuration of each board arranged as described above will be described, and the supply path of the power supply voltage will be mentioned.

FIG. 11 shows an example of substrates arranged on the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6, respectively.
In this case, as the boards mounted on the game board 3, the main control board 20, the effect control board 30, the frame LED relay board 840, the LED connection board 700, the board back left relay board 720, the decorative board 740, the relay board 760, and the LED The substrate 780, the LED substrate 790, the relay substrate 800 under the back of the panel, and the decorative substrate 820 are shown.
As the board mounted on the inner frame 2, the power supply board 300, the payout control board 29, and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are shown.
The boards mounted on the door 6 include a front frame LED connection board 500, a relay board 550, a side unit upper right LED board 600, a side unit lower right LED board 620, a side unit upper LED board 630, a button LED connection board 640, and a button. The LED board 660 is shown.

Each of these boards is a part of the board mounted on the game machine 1, and the boards mounted on the game board 3, the inner frame 2, and the door 6 include various boards other than those shown in the drawing. FIG. 11 shows the connection system of the substrates extracted for use in the explanation of the technique as the embodiment of the present invention, and does not show all the substrates.

The power supply board 300 is a board that supplies a DC voltage that serves as an operating power supply to each part based on the AC input power supply.
The main control board 20, the effect control board 30, and the payout control board 29 are as described with reference to FIG.

The front frame LED connection board 500 is a board for supplying an operation control signal and a power supply voltage to an effect means such as an LED provided on the door 6, a motor, a solenoid, and a blower of a movable body.

The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, the LED board 620 on the lower right of the side unit, and the LED board 630 on the side unit are boards arranged in the side unit 10, and constitute a drive control system for modes of LEDs and movable objects. These boards also constitute a detection system that transmits detection signals of motor position sensors, touch sensors, and other various sensors to the effect control board 30.
As described above, the side unit 10 is attached to the door 6 as one of the decorative units, and the side unit 10 is detachable and replaceable with respect to the door 6. The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, the LED board 620 on the lower right of the side unit, and the LED board 630 on the side unit are attached and detached together with the side unit 10.
The side unit 10 is mounted, and the relay board 550 and the transmission line H10 of the side unit upper right LED board 600 are connected to electrically form the configuration shown in FIG.

The button LED substrate 660 constitutes an LED in the effect button 13 and a light emitting drive system thereof, and also constitutes a circuit for transferring detection signals of various detection sensors.
The button LED connection board 640 relays the control signal and the power supply voltage to the button LED board 660, and also transfers the detection signals of various sensors.

The inner frame LED relay board 400 relays between the frame LED relay board 840 connected to the effect control board 30 and the front frame LED connection board 500, performs necessary signal processing, and generates and supplies a power supply voltage. ..
The frame LED relay board 840 relays the signal path between the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the effect control board 30.

The LED boards 780 and 790 are equipped with the LEDs in the game board 3 and drive the light emission thereof. The relay board 760 relays the light emission drive signal of the LED. These LED substrates 780 and 790 and the relay substrate 760 are attached to the movable body accessory.
The decorative substrate 740 relays and drives other LED substrates.
The back left relay board 720 relays.
The decorative substrate 820 mounts an LED.
The relay board 800 under the back of the board relays.
The LED connection board 700 performs various necessary signal processing for driving light emission of the effect means such as an LED and a motor based on the control signal from the effect control board 30.

Each of these boards is electrically connected by a transmission line H using a harness and a cable. "Transmission line H" is a general term for the illustrated transmission lines H1, H2, ... H31.
In each transmission line H, each wiring path for transmitting a signal, a power supply voltage, or the like is also simply referred to as a “line”.
Transmission line H refers to a set of one or more lines.
The transmission line H includes various forms such as a flexible harness, a flexible substrate, and a wire harness. Further, the transmission line H may be one in which a plurality of lines are integrated, or one in which individual lines are grouped by a binder, tape, or the like.
Further, when the connectors are directly connected to each other, the terminal of each connector becomes the transmission line H. That is, even if there is no wire such as a harness, it is included in the "transmission line H".
That is, the transmission line H does not refer to a specific type and shape, but broadly refers to a line that forms electrical wiring between substrates and the like.

The power supply board 300 and the payout control board 29 are connected by a transmission line H1.
Further, the power supply board 300 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are connected by a transmission line H3.
These transmission lines H1 and H3 are due to a harness or the like arranged in the inner frame 2.

The power supply board 300 and the effect control board 30 are connected by a transmission line H2.
The payout control board 29 and the main control board 20 are connected by a transmission line H4.
The inner frame LED relay board 400 and the frame LED relay board 840 are connected by a transmission line H7.
These transmission lines H2, H4, and H7 are formed by a harness or the like that is connected so as to straddle between the inner frame 2 and the game board 3.

The main control board 20 and the effect control board 30 are connected by a transmission line H5.
The effect control board 30 and the frame LED relay board 840 are connected by a transmission line H6.
The effect control board 30 and the LED connection board 700 are connected by a transmission line H20.
The LED connection board 700 and the back left relay board 720 are connected by a transmission line H21.
The left relay board 720 on the back of the board and the decorative board 740 are connected by a transmission line H22.
The decorative substrate 740 and the relay substrate 760 are connected by a transmission line H23. It is conceivable that the transmission line H23 is a flexible cable for connection with the relay board 760 attached to the movable body accessory.
The relay board 760 and the LED board 780 are connected by a transmission line H24.
The LED board 780 and the LED board 790 are connected by a transmission line H25.
The LED connection board 700 and the underboard relay board 800 are connected by a transmission line H30.
The underboard relay board 800 and the decorative board 820 are connected by a transmission line H31.
These transmission lines H5, H6, H20, H21, H22, H23, H24, H25, H30, and H31 are based on harnesses arranged in the game board 3.

The inner frame LED relay board 400 and the front frame LED connection board 500 are connected by a transmission line H8.
The transmission line H8 is formed by a harness or the like that is connected so as to straddle between the inner frame 2 and the door 6.

The front frame LED connection board 500 and the relay board 550 are connected by a transmission line H9.
The relay board 550 and the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit are connected by a transmission line H10.
The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit and the LED board 620 on the lower right of the side unit are connected by a transmission line H11.
The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit and the LED board 630 on the side unit are connected by a transmission line H12.
The front frame LED connection board 500 and the button LED connection board 640 are connected by a transmission line H15.
The button LED connection board 640 and the button LED board 660 are connected by a transmission line H16.
These transmission lines H9, H10, H11, H12, H15, and H16 are due to a harness or the like arranged in the door 6.

The power supply board 300 supplies a power supply voltage to each part by transmission lines H1, H2, and H3.
FIG. 12 shows the power supply system input / output of the power supply board 300.
The power supply board 300 is mounted with connectors CN1A to CN7A.
The transmission line ends of the transmission lines H40, H41, and H42 (not shown in FIG. 11) are connected to the connectors CN5A, CN6A, and CN7A.

Hereinafter, the connectors CN1A to CN7A and the connectors shown in other figures are also collectively referred to as "connector CN".
And in this specification, "connector CN" refers to a connector terminal component provided on a substrate. The terminal portion is referred to as a "transmission line end" because of the connector connection formed at the end portion of the transmission line H.
The "connector CN" is connected to the "transmission line end". Alternatively, the "connector CN" may be directly connected to another connector CN of the corresponding shape.

AC24V power is supplied from the power plug 301 of the gaming machine 1 to the connector CN5A having a three-terminal configuration by the transmission line H40 (AC-IN (A), AC-IN (B)).
Further, an FG (frame ground) path (FG) is formed via the ground terminal 302, the transmission line H40, and the connector CN5A. The ground terminal 302 is connected to, for example, outside the main body of the gaming machine.

A transmission line H41 is connected to the connector CN6A having a two-terminal configuration, and an FG path (FG-1) is formed via the ground terminals 303 and 304. The ground terminals 303 and 304 are connected to, for example, a gaming machine main body.
A transmission line H42 is connected to the connector CN7A having a two-terminal configuration, and an FG path (FG-2) is formed via the ground terminals 305 and 306. The ground terminals 305 and 306 are connected to, for example, a gaming machine main body.

A transmission line H1-1 is connected to the connector CN1A having a 14-terminal configuration. A transmission line H1-1 is connected to the connector CN4A having a three-terminal configuration. The transmission lines H1-1 and H1-2 as these two harnesses and the like are shown as the transmission line H1 in FIG. 11 described above.
A 35V DC voltage (DC35VA), a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA), and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VA) are supplied to the payout control board 29 by the transmission line H1-1, and a ground path (GND) is formed.
Two systems of 24V DC voltage (DC24VA, DC24VB) are supplied to the payout control board 29 by the transmission line H1-2, and an FG path (FG) is formed.

A 35V DC voltage (DC35VA), a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA), and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VA) are supplied to the main control board 20 via the payout control board 29, and a ground path (GND) is formed. ..

A transmission line H2 is connected to the connector CN2A having a 20-terminal configuration.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and a 35V DC voltage (DC35VB) are supplied to the effect control board 30 by the transmission line H2, and a ground path (GND) is formed.

Based on the power supply by the transmission line H2, 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and 35V DC voltage (DC35VB) are supplied from the effect control board 30 to the LED connection board 700, and the LED connection board. It is used as an operating power source for the 700 and each downstream board (board back left relay board 720, board back bottom relay board 800, etc.).
On the other hand, the frame LED relay board 840 is a board having a simple relay wiring and does not require a power supply voltage, and the power supply voltage is not supplied from the effect control board 30.

For the sake of explanation, the expressions "upstream" and "downstream" are used, but with respect to data and control signals, the main control board 20 is the most upstream, followed by the effect control board 30, and the effect control board 30 actually connects the LEDs, motors, and the like. "Downstream" toward the production device of.
Regarding the power supply voltage, the power supply board 300 is the most upstream, and is “downstream” toward the actual effect device.

A transmission line H3 is connected to the connector CN3A having a 6-terminal configuration.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the inner frame LED relay board 400 by the transmission line H3, and a ground path (GND) is formed.
That is, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is a board controlled by the effect control board 30, but is configured to receive the power supply voltage directly from the power supply board 300.
Each board (front frame LED connection board 500, etc.) provided on the door 6 downstream of the inner frame LED relay board 400 receives power supply voltage from the inner frame LED relay board 400.

[5.2 Inner frame LED relay board 400]

Hereinafter, some circuit configurations of the substrates shown in FIG. 11 will be described. First, the inner frame LED relay board 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.
13 and 14 show the circuit configurations provided on the inner frame LED relay board 400 separately.

The connector CN1B, CN2B, CN3B shown in FIG. 13 and the connector CN4B shown in FIG. 14 are mounted on the inner frame LED relay board 400.

The connector CN1B is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H7 that connects to the frame LED relay board 840.
Although the details of the frame LED relay board 840 are omitted, it is a board having a simple relay wiring as described above. Therefore, the connector CN1B substantially forms the wiring with the effect control board 30 via the transmission line H7, the frame LED relay board 840, and the transmission line H6.

This connector CN1B has a 28-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 28th pin as the numbers "1" to "28" are attached.
For convenience of explanation, the term "pin" of the connector CN does not only refer to a pin-shaped male terminal, but also includes both a male terminal and a female terminal, and also includes a so-called planar contact pattern and the corresponding contact pattern. It is used as a device that also includes terminals.

The 1st pin, the 3rd pin, the 5th pin, the 7th pin, the 8th pin, the 17th pin, and the 18th pin are ground terminals. The second pin is assigned as the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the fourth pin is assigned as the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin is assigned as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.

Pin 9 is the clear signal CLR_L, pin 10 is the clear signal CLR_M, pin 11 is the clock signal CLK_L, pin 12 is the clock signal CLK_M, pin 13 is the data signal DATA_L, pin 14 is the data signal DATA_M, and pin 15. Pins are assigned as enable signal ENABLE_L, and pin 16 is assigned as enable signal ENABLE_M terminals.
The 19th to 28th pins are assigned to the + terminal and the-terminal of each of the upper right speaker, the middle right speaker, the lower right speaker, the upper left speaker, the middle left speaker, and the lower speaker as the speaker 46.

Here, the serial data signal S_IN_DATA is serial data received from the front frame LED connection board 500 and transmitted from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the effect control board 30.
The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied from the effect control board 30 to the inner frame LED relay board 400, and further sent to the front frame LED connection board 500. These are used for the serial data transmission operation from the front frame LED connection board 500 on the downstream side.

The clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, and ENABLE_M are signals used for driving control of the effect device supplied from the effect control board 30.
For example, the data signals DATA_L and DATA_M are light emission drive signals and motor drive signals indicating the gradation of the LED, and the clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, etc., clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, etc., and the enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, etc. are LED drivers. This is a signal for controlling the operation of the motor driver.
The "_L" at the end of the clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, etc. indicates that the signal is mainly used for LED operation control, and "_M" is a signal mainly used for motor operation control.

The connector CN2B is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H8 that connects to the front frame LED connection board 500.
This connector CN2B has a 30-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 30th pin as shown by the numbers "1" to "30".

The first pin and the third pin are terminals of 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The four pins from the 27th pin to the 30th pin are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 5th pin, the 7th pin, the 8th pin, the 17th pin, and the 18th pin are ground terminals.
The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connector CN2B are connected to the ground. This is due to the mounting strength of the connector. The conductor points P1 and P2 are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.
For all the other illustrated connector CNs, the conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.

The second pin is assigned as the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the fourth pin is assigned as the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin is assigned as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.
Pin 9 is the clear signal CLR_L, pin 10 is the clear signal CLR_M, pin 11 is the clock signal CLK_L, pin 12 is the clock signal CLK_M, pin 13 is the data signal DATA_L, pin 14 is the data signal DATA_M, and pin 15. The pin is assigned as a general-purpose output port, and the 16th pin is assigned as each terminal of the enable signal ENABLE_M.
Pins 19 to 26 are assigned to the + and-terminals of the upper right speaker, the middle right speaker, the lower right speaker, the upper left speaker, and the middle left speaker as the speaker 46 as shown in the figure.

The connector CN3B is a connector for connecting to the lower speaker, which is one of the speakers 46 (not shown in FIG. 11). In this connector CN3B, the 1st pin and the 2nd pin with the numbers "1" and "2" are assigned to the + terminal and the-terminal of the lower speaker, and are connected to the 27th and 28th pins of the connector CN1B. ..

The connector CN4B of FIG. 14 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H3 connected to the power supply board 300, and is connected to the connector CN3A of the power supply board 300 shown in FIG.
The connector CN4B has a 6-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 6th pin as the numbers “1” to “6” are attached, and is assigned in the same manner as the connector CN3A of the power supply board 300. That is, the first pin, the second pin, and the third pin are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) is supplied from the power supply board 300. Pins 4, 5, and 6 are ground terminals.

In this case, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is configured to input the 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) from the first pin, the second pin, and the third pin to the voltage regulator 401 via the fuse F1B, and the voltage regulator 401 A 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is obtained as an output. Capacitors C3B, C4B, C5B, and C6B are connected in parallel between the input terminal side of the voltage regulator 401 and the ground. A capacitor C7B and a resistor R24B are connected in parallel between the output terminal side of the voltage regulator 401 and the ground.
That is, a 5V generator 410 that generates a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) is formed.

From the first pin and the third pin of the connector CN2B of FIG. 13, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) thus generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400 is supplied to the board on the downstream side.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 27th pin to the 30th pin of the connector CN2B to the substrate on the downstream side is passed through the 1st pin, the 2nd pin, and the 3rd pin of the connector CN4B of FIG. This is the voltage supplied from the power supply board 300.

As shown in FIG. 13, buffer circuits 402 and 403 by ICs are arranged on the inner frame LED relay board 400.
As the buffer circuits 402 and 403, an IC that functions as an inverter when the CONT terminal of the first pin is at the L level and as a buffer at the H level is used. In this case, the H level is applied by applying a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). It functions as a buffer.
Further, as an operating power source, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is applied to the VCC terminal of the 20th pin.

The buffer circuits 402 and 403 are Schmitt trigger buffers containing CMOS8 circuits, and buffer the signals input from the 2nd pin (A1 terminal) to the 9th pin (A8 terminal), that is, signal compensation (deteriorated H /). Restoration of the L signal waveform) is performed, and outputs are performed from the 18th pin (Y1 terminal) to the 11th pin (Y8 terminal), respectively.
That is, the signal input to the A1 terminal is buffered and output from the Y1 terminal, the signal input to the A2 terminal is buffered and output from the Y2 terminal, and the signal input to the A8 terminal is buffered. Is output from the Y8 terminal.
The buffer processing is a signal compensation processing by signal amplification or waveform shaping, but since it mainly targets a pulse signal as digital data, the meaning of waveform shaping is great. Hereinafter, these processes are referred to as "buffer processing" or "signal compensation".

The buffer circuit 402 performs signal compensation for the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the serial data signal S_IN_DATA.
The clock signal S_IN_CLK from the second pin of the connector CN1B is input to the A3 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y3 terminal, and supplied to the second pin of the connector CN2B.
The load signal S_IN_LOAD from the 4th pin of the connector CN1B is input to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y1 terminal, and supplied to the 4th pin of the connector CN2B.
The serial data signal S_IN_DATA input to the 6th pin of the connector CN2B from the downstream side is input to the A5 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, output from the Y5 terminal, and supplied to the 6th pin of the connector CN1B.

The buffer circuit 402 includes a third pin (A2 terminal), a fifth pin (A4 terminal), a seventh pin (A6 terminal), an eighth pin (A7 terminal), a ninth pin (A8 terminal), and a tenth pin (A8 terminal). The GND terminal) and the 19th pin (G￣ terminal) are connected to the ground. The 11th pin (Y8 terminal), the 12th pin (Y7 terminal), the 13th pin (Y6 terminal), the 15th pin (Y4 terminal), and the 17th pin (Y2 terminal) are open.

The buffer circuit 403 compensates for the clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, data signal DATA_M, pin 15 for enable signal ENABLE_L, and pin 16 for enable signal ENABLE_M.
Each of these signals input from the 9th pin to the 16th pin of the connector CN1B is input to any of the A1 terminal to the A8 terminal of the buffer circuit 402, and is output from the Y1 terminal to the Y8 terminal to be output from the Y1 terminal to the Y8 terminal of the connector CN2B. It is supplied to pins 9 to 16.
In the buffer circuit 403, the 10th pin (GND terminal) and the 19th pin (G￣ terminal) are connected to the ground.

As described above, the inner frame LED relay board 400 has the following configuration.
The clock signal S_IN_CLK and load signal S_IN_LOAD supplied from the effect control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) to the connector CN1B are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 402 and transmitted to the downstream side by the connector CN2B.
-The serial data signal S_IN_DATA supplied from the downstream front frame LED connection board 500 to the connector CN2B is signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 402 and transmitted to the upstream side by the connector CN1B.
-The clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M supplied from the effect control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) to the connector CN1B are signal compensated by the buffer circuit 403. Then, it is transmitted to the downstream side by the connector CN2B.

-The audio signal to the speaker is relayed and transmitted directly to the board or speaker unit on the downstream side.
-The power supply voltage is not supplied from the connector CN1B (transmission line H7) connected to the effect control board 30 side (frame LED relay board 840).
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is received from the power supply board 300 by the connector CN4B and supplied to the downstream side via the fuse F1B.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12V) is used to generate the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) used on the downstream side, which is used as the operating power source for the 403 of the buffer circuit 402 and is supplied to the downstream side.

In the inner frame LED relay board 400, in addition to the above, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, resistors R1B to R26B, resistances by chip resistors RA1B and RA2B, and capacitors C1B to C17B are connected to the required locations. ..
For example, for clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, clear signal CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signal CLK_L, CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signal ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M, resistors R25B, R26B, R8B, R9B, R10B, R11B, R12B, R13B, R14B, and R15B are inserted as damping resistors. Further, resistors R3B and R2B, chip resistors RA1B and RA2B are inserted as damping resistors on the output side (connector CN2B side).
In this case, when the wiring distance between the connector and the damping resistor is LA, and the wiring distance between the damping resistor and the buffer circuits 402 and 403 is LB,
LA <LB
It is a relationship of. That is, the damping resistor is arranged closer to the connector (CN1B or CN2B) than the buffer circuits 402 and 403. This enhances the signal noise reduction performance.

[5.3 Front frame LED connection board 500]

The front frame LED connection substrate 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15, 16, 17, 18, 18, 19, and 20. These figures show the circuit configurations provided on the front frame LED connection board 500 separately.

The front frame LED connection board 500 has connectors CN2C, CN5C, CN6C, CN8C in FIG. 15, connectors CN1C, CN4C in FIG. 16, connectors CN3C in FIG. 17, connectors CN7C, CN9C in FIG. 20, and connectors CN10C in FIG. Is installed.

The connector CN2C of FIG. 15 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H8 connected to the connector CN2B of the inner frame LED relay board 400 of FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN2C has a 30-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 30th pin as the numbers “1” to “30” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2B described above. Conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connector CN2C are also connected to the ground. This is because of the mounting strength of the connector, and the conductor points P1 and P2 are not connected to the ground terminal inside the connector.
Although not mentioned again, the conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, CN7C, CN8C, CN9C, and CN10C, which will be described later, are also connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The connector CN5C is a connector for connecting to the right middle speaker, which is one of the speakers 46. This connector CN3B is assigned to the + and-terminals of the 1st pin and the 2nd pin with the numbers "1" and "2" for the right middle speaker, and is connected to the 20th and 22nd pins of the connector CN2C. There is.

The connector CN6C is a connector for connecting to the left middle speaker, which is one of the speakers 46. In this connector CN6B, the 1st pin and the 2nd pin with the numbers "1" and "2" are assigned to the + terminal and the-terminal of the left middle speaker, and are connected to the 24th and 26th pins of the connector CN2C. There is.

The connector CN8C is a connector for connecting to the upper right speaker and the upper left speaker, which are one of the speakers 46. In this connector CN6B, the 1st pin and the 2nd pin with the numbers "1" and "2" are assigned to the + terminal and the-terminal of the upper right speaker, and are connected to the 19th pin and the 21st pin of the connector CN2C. .. Further, the 3rd pin and the 4th pin with the numbers "3" and "4" are assigned to the + terminal and the-terminal of the upper left speaker, and are connected to the 23rd pin and the 25th pin of the connector CN2C.

The connector CN1C of FIG. 16 is a connector connected to an LED substrate (not shown) in FIG.
The connector CN4C is also connected to an LED board in a handle (not shown).

The connector CN1C has a 13-terminal configuration from the first pin to the thirteenth pin as shown by the numbers “1” to “13”.
Pins 1 and 6 are ground terminals, pin 2 is a clock signal CLK terminal, pin 3 is a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) terminal, pin 4 is a data signal DATA terminal, and pin 5 is a reset signal RESET. The terminal of No. 7 and the 7th pin are terminals of 12V DC voltage (DC12V).

Pins 8 to 13 are the LED emission drive currents (17-R6, 17-) of R, G, and B supplied from the LED driver provided on the LED board on the downstream side (not shown) to which the connector CN1C is connected. G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) input terminals.
This LED emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) is not shown separately from the 2nd pin to the 7th pin of the connector CN4C as it is. It is supplied to the LED board in the handle on the downstream side of.

That is, on the downstream side of the front frame LED connection board 500, the LED board (not shown) and the LED board in the handle are connected by the connectors CN1C and the connector CN4C, and the LED driver is mounted on the LED board. The LED driver operates using the clock signal CLK, 5V DC voltage (DC5V) from the connector CN1C, the data signal DATA, the reset signal RESET terminal, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12V) to drive the LED on the LED substrate. At the same time, the LED emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) for the LED on the LED substrate in the handle is also generated. The LED emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) is supplied to the LED of the LED board in the handle by relaying the front frame LED connection board 500. Will be.

Since it is the path of the LED emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7), each of the 2nd to 7th pins of the connector CN4C Is connected to Zener diodes D8C to D15C as a protection circuit.
Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to the first pin of the connector CN4C, and a power supply voltage is supplied to the LED substrate side in the handle (not shown).

Such a configuration is used so that two LED boards are connected downstream of the front frame LED connection board 500 and the LED driver is provided only on one of them.
That is, the front frame LED connection board 500 outputs a clock signal CLK, 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a data signal DATA, a reset signal RESET, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12V) for the operation of the LED driver. Then, the LED light emission drive current by the LED driver is returned, relayed, and sent to the other LED substrate.

In this case, only one LED driver is required to drive the two LED boards on the downstream side. In particular, when light emission is controlled by a common LED drive control signal, it is sufficient to transmit the LED drive control signal to only one LED substrate, and simplification of the wiring configuration can be promoted. That is, it is not necessary to transmit the clock signal CLK, 5V DC voltage (DC5V), data signal DATA, reset signal RESET, and 12V DC voltage (DC12V) to both LED boards.
In addition, by relaying the LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17-G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7), a harness that transmits these between the two downstream LED boards can be used. It becomes unnecessary.

The connector CN3C of FIG. 17 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H9 connecting to the relay board 550 on the downstream side.
This connector CN3C has a 22-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 22nd pin as the numbers "1" to "22" are attached.

Five pins, pin 1, pin 3, pin 11, pin 13, and pin 18, are ground terminals.
The second pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The three pins, the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 9th pin, are terminals for a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB).

The 4th pin is assigned as a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, the 6th pin is assigned as a load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the 8th pin is assigned as a clock signal S_IN_CLK.

Pin 10 is the enable signal ENABLE_L, pin 12 is the clear signal CLR_P, pin 14 is the reset signal RESET_P, pin 15 is the clock signal CLK_M, pin 16 is the data signal DATA_P, pin 17 is the reset signal RESET_M, and pin 19. Pins are assigned as data signal DATA_M, pin 20 is assigned as drive general-purpose signal 1, pin 21 is assigned as enable signal ENABLE_M, and pin 22 is assigned as drive general-purpose signal 2.

The connector CN7C of FIG. 18 is connected to a substrate (not shown) for detecting a cross key 15a, a decision key 15b, a volume button (not shown), a light amount button, and the like. This connector CN7C has a 9-terminal configuration of pins 1 to 9 indicated by "1" to "9", the first pin is a ground terminal, and each pin of the second to ninth pins is a cross key. The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, which are detection signals for operations such as 15a, are input.
The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 of pins 2 to 9 are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via chip resistors RA3C and RA4C.

The connector CN9C is connected to a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15. This connector CN9C has a two-terminal configuration indicated by "1" and "2". The sense signal SENS14 from the touch sensor is input to the first pin, and the second pin is the ground terminal.
The sense signal SENS14 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via a resistor R26C.

The connector CN10C of FIG. 20 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H15 connected to the button LED connection board 640 of FIG.
This connector CN10C has a 20-terminal configuration from pins 1 to 20 with "1" to "20".

Five pins, pin 2, pin 4, pin 12, pin 13, and pin 19, are ground terminals.
The eighth pin is a terminal of 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The sixth pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
Pins 5 and 7 are terminals for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V).

Pin 1 is the motor drive signal MOTφ / 2, pin 3 is the motor drive signal MOTφ / 1, pin 9 is the motor drive signal MOTφ2, pin 10 is the motor drive signal DCMOT3, and pin 11 is the motor drive signal MOTφ1. Assigned as a terminal.

The 14th pin is assigned as a clear signal CLR_L, the 16th pin is assigned as a clock signal CLK_L, and the 18th pin is assigned as a data signal DATA_L terminal.
The 15th pin, the 17th pin, and the 20th pin are terminals to which the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11, which are detection signals from the downstream side, are input.
The sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via a chip resistor RA5C.

The power supply voltage of the front frame LED connection board 500 will be described.
The front frame LED connection board 500 is provided with buffer circuits 501, 502, 503, 507, 508, which are Schmitt trigger buffers containing eight circuits similar to the buffer circuit 402 described above, and triple buffer gates, as ICs. A buffer circuit 504,512,513 is mounted.
As the power supply voltage for these, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of the connector CN2C is used.

Further, as an IC, the parallel / serial (hereinafter “P / S”) conversion circuits 505 and 506 of FIG. 18 are mounted, and the power supply voltage for these is also a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of the connector CN2C. ) Is used.

Further, as the IC, the LED driver 509 of FIG. 19 is mounted, and as the power supply voltage for this, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from pins 27 to 30 of the connector CN2C is used.

Further, as the IC, the motor drivers 510 and 511 of FIG. 19 are mounted, and these use a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) as the power supply voltage.
The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is the power supply voltage for driving the motor, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is the power supply voltage for the motor drivers such as the motor drivers 510 and 511.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). As shown in FIG. 15, a capacitor C11 is inserted between the 27th pin to the 30th pin of the connector CN2C and the capacitor C11, and the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D18C is connected to the positive electrode side of the capacitor C11. There is. A resistor R27C, capacitors C12C, C13C, and a chip varistor 515 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D18C and the ground. With this configuration, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as the power supply voltage with overvoltage protection.
That is, a power supply separation / protection circuit 520 that separates the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VA) is formed.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by using the power supply separation / protection circuit 521 by the diode D19C, the resistor R34C, and the capacitor C21C shown in FIG.

The flow of various signals in the front frame LED connection board 500 will be described below.
Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose output port signals (general-purpose signal HANYOU), and enable signals ENABLE_M are transmitted to the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 from the inner frame LED relay board 400. Will be done.
Each of these signals is input to the A1 terminal to the A8 terminal of the buffer circuit 501, and the signal is compensated.
The clear signals CLR_L and CLR_M supplied from the inner frame LED relay board 400 are shown as reset signals RESET_L and RESET_M in the front frame LED connection board 500.

The clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the reset signal RESET_L are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 and then supplied to the buffer circuit 504 of FIG. 16 via the chip resistor RA1C. Then, after being buffered, it is output from the connector CN1C to an LED board (not shown).

Further, these clock signals CLK_L, general-purpose signal HANYOU, data signal DATA_L, and reset signal RESET_L, which are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 of FIG. 15, are the A5 terminal, A6 terminal, A7 terminal, and A8 terminal of the buffer circuit 502 of FIG. Is supplied to. The outputs of the Y5 terminal, Y6 terminal, Y7 terminal, and Y8 terminal of the signal-compensated buffer circuit 502 are relayed from the connector CN3C as a clock signal CLK_P, an enable signal ENABLE_L (from the general-purpose signal HANYOU), a data signal DATA_P, and a reset signal RESET_P. It is output to the board 550.

That is, the signals for LED control and the like output from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 are signal-compensated and transmitted by the buffer circuits 501 and 502 to the downstream side after the relay board 550.

The clock signal CLK_P is a constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D5C and the resistor R19C, the enable signal ENABLE_L is the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D4C and the resistor R15C, and the data signal DATA_P is the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D6C and the resistor R20C. The protection circuit and reset signal RESET_P are output from the connector CN3C via the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D7C and the resistor R21C, respectively.

Further, the clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the reset signal RESET_L signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 of FIG. 15 are supplied to the buffer circuit 512 of FIG. Then, after amplification processing, the connector CN10C outputs the clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L) to the button LED connection board 640.

Therefore, on the downstream side after the button LED connection board 640, the signal for LED control etc. output from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 is signal-compensated and transmitted by the buffer circuits 501 and 512. Become.

Further, the clock signal CLK_L, the data signal DATA_L, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU_L signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 of FIG. 15 are supplied to the LED driver 509 of FIG.
The LED driver 509 is a device that outputs a light emission drive current corresponding to the clock signal CLK_L and the data signal DATA_L. In this case, the LED driver 509 is mainly used as a serial / parallel (S / P) conversion circuit for driving a motor.
The LED driver 509 has LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 output terminals for light emission drive current, and can output 24 drive currents. In this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, It uses 7 terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, and LEDR3. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to the ground.
And the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3 output (current 23-R1, 23-G1, 23-B1, 23-R2, 23-G2, 23-B2, 23-R3) After being buffered by the buffer circuit 508, it is supplied to the input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4 of the motor driver 510 and the input terminals IN1, IN3, IN4 of the motor driver 511.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, and LEDR3 are for passing currents 23-R1, 23-G1, 23-B1, 23-R2, 23-G2, 23-B2, and 23-R3. It is connected to a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) via chip resistors RA6C and RA7C.

The motor driver 510 outputs the motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1- / 1, MOT1-2, MOT1- / 2 from the output terminals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 based on the signals of the input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4. Output.
The motor driver 511 outputs the motor drive signals MOT3-1, MOT3-3, and MOT3-4 from the output terminals OUT1, OUT3, and OUT4 based on the signals of the input terminals IN1, IN3, and IN4.

The motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1- / 1, MOT1-2, MOT1- / 2, and MOT3-1 are supplied to the connector CN10 of FIG. It is output to the button LED connection board 640 as MOTφ / 2 and DCMOT3.
The motor drive signals MOT3-3 and MOT3-4 are supplied to the connector CN3C of FIG. 17 and are output to the relay board 550 as the drive general-purpose signal 1 and the drive general-purpose signal 2 described above.

The above is a circuit system that generates a motor drive signal after the button LED connection board 640 on the downstream side by using the clock signal CLK_L-, the data signal DATA_L-, and the general-purpose signal HANYOU_L- in the front frame LED connection board 500.

The clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_M, enable signal ENABLE_M, and clear signal CLR_M (reset signal RESET_M) input from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 501 and then passed through the chip resistor RA2C in FIG. It is supplied to the A1 terminal, the A3 terminal, the A5 terminal, and the A7 terminal of the buffer circuit 503. The output of the Y1 terminal, Y3 terminal, Y5 terminal, and Y7 terminal of the signal-compensated buffer circuit 503 is output from the connector CN3C to the relay board 550 as a clock signal CLK_M, a data signal DATA_M, an enable signal ENABLE_M, and a reset signal RESET_M. ..

Therefore, the signal for motor control from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 is signal-compensated and transmitted by the buffer circuits 501 and 503 to the downstream side after the relay board 550.

The clock signal CLK_M is a constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D12C and the resistor R22C, the enable signal ENABLE_M is the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D16C and the resistor R24C, and the data signal DATA_M is the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D14C and the resistor R23C. The protection circuit and reset signal RESET_M are output from the connector CN3C via the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D17C and the resistor R25C, respectively.

The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD input from the connector CN2C of FIG. 15 are supplied to the A3 terminal and the A2 terminal of the buffer circuit 502 of FIG. Then, the outputs of the Y3 terminal and the Y2 terminal of the signal-compensated buffer circuit 502 are output from the connector CN3C to the relay board 550 as a clock signal S_IN_CLK and a load signal S_IN_LOAD.
Therefore, the signal for serial data transmission is signal-compensated and transmitted by the buffer circuits 501 and 502 to the downstream side after the relay board 550.

The clock signal S_IN_CLK is output from the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D3C and the resistor R11C, and the load signal S_IN_LOAD is output from the connector CN3C via the constant voltage / protection circuit by the Zener diode D2C and the resistor R9C, respectively.

The serial data signal S_IN_DATAx input from the relay board 550 on the downstream side to the connector CN3C of FIG. 17 is supplied to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 502. Then, the output of the Y1 terminal of the signal-compensated buffer circuit 502 is input to the SI terminal (serial input terminal) of the P / S conversion circuit 505 of FIG.

The P / S conversion circuit 505 and the P / S conversion circuit 506 in the figure are CMOS 8-bit shift registers, have 8-bit parallel input / output, serial input, and serial output, and perform parallel-series conversion of data. ..
When P / S CONT terminal = L, 8 terminals from Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal become parallel output, SI terminal data is stored in each register at the rising edge of the input waveform of CK terminal, and Q / D1 terminal. It is output to the ~ Q / D8 terminal. Also, by setting CLR / LOAD pin = L, each register is reset asynchronously to the input of the CK pin.
When P / S CONT terminal = H, 8 terminals of Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal become parallel input, and when CLR / LOAD terminal = L, input of Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal asynchronously to CK terminal input. Data is stored in each register.

In the case of this example, in the P / S conversion circuits 505 and 506, the P / S CONT terminal = H is set by applying a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) to the P / S CONT terminal, and the Q / D1 terminal to Q The 8 terminals of the / D8 terminal are parallel inputs.
Further, the clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD input from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 are buffered by the buffer circuit 513 and input to the P / S conversion circuits 505 and 506, respectively. That is, the clock signal S_IN_CLK becomes the input of the CK terminal, and the load signal S_IN_LOAD becomes the input of the CLR / LOAD terminal.

In the Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P / S conversion circuit 505, the Q / D1 terminal is the sense signal SENS8, the Q / D2 terminal is the sense signal SENS9, and the Q / D4 terminal is the sense signal SENS11. , Sense signal SENS14 is input to the Q / D7 terminal.
The Q / D3 terminal, Q / D5 terminal, Q / D6 terminal, and Q / D8 terminal are connected to the ground. That is, each input becomes "0" (L level).
The sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 detect the switch sensor that detects the button operation and the rotation position and the origin position of the movable body inside the button, which are input to the connector CN10C in FIG. 20 from the button LED connection board 640 downstream. It is a detection signal of the sensor.
The sense signal SENS14 is a touch sensor detection signal input from the connector CN9C of FIG.

The P / S conversion circuit 505 collectively converts the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 input as described above into serial data, and outputs the serial data signal SDT1 from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT1 is input to the SI terminal of the P / S conversion circuit 506.

In the Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P / S conversion circuit 506, the Q / D1 terminal has a sense signal SENS0, the Q / D2 terminal has a sense signal SENS1, and the Q / D3 terminal has a sense signal SENS2. , Sense signal SENS3 is input to Q / D4 terminal, Sense signal SENS4 is input to Q / D5 terminal, Sense signal SENS5 is input to Q / D6 terminal, Sense signal SENS6 is input to Q / D7 terminal, and Sense signal SENS7 is input to Q / D8 terminal.
These sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are detection signals such as the cross key 15a input to the connector CN7C of FIG.
The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 from the connector CN7C are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 507 and then input to the above terminals of the P / S conversion circuit 506.

The P / S conversion circuit 506 collectively converts the serial data signal SDT1 from the P / S conversion circuit 505 input to the SI terminal and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 into serial data, and Q8 as the serial data signal SDT2. Output from the terminal. This serial data signal SDT2 is input to the buffer circuit 513 via a filter by a resistor R35C and a capacitor C27C, and is buffered. This output is transmitted upstream from the connector CN2C in FIG. 15 as a serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500.

As described above, the front frame LED connection board 500 has the following configuration.
FIG. 21 shows clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M (reset signals RESET_L, RESET_M), data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose signals HANYOU, and enable signals supplied from the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400 to the connector CN2C. The flow about ENABLE_M is summarized.

-Clock signal CLK_L, clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), data signal DATA_L, general-purpose signal HANYOU are used as clock signal CLK_P, reset signal RESET_P, data signal DATA_P, enable signal ENABLE_L by connector CN3C via buffer circuits 501 and 502. It is transmitted to the downstream side.
The clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), and the data signal DATA_L are transmitted to the downstream side as the clock signal CLK, the reset signal RESET, and the data signal DATA by the connector CN1C via the buffer circuit 504.
The clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L (reset signal RESET_L), and the data signal DATA_L are transmitted to the downstream side as the clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L, and the data signal DATA_L by the connector CN10C via the buffer circuit 512.
The clock signal CLK_L and the data signal DATA_L are the general-purpose signals HANYOU, which are supplied to the LED driver 509 and used to generate the motor drive current.

The clock signal CLK_M, clear signal CLR_M (reset signal RESET_M), data signal DATA_M, and enable signal ENABLE_M are used as the clock signal CLK_M, reset signal RESET_M, data signal DATA_M, and enable signal ENABLE_M by the connector CN3C via the buffer circuits 501 and 503. It is sent to the downstream side.

-Motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ / 1, MOTφ2, MOTφ / 2, and DCMOT3 are generated by the LED driver 509, buffer circuit 508, and motor driver 510,511 used as the S / P conversion circuit, and transmitted from the connector CN10C to the downstream side. Will be done.

Further, FIG. 22 summarizes the flow of the serial data signal S_IN_DATA, the clock signal S_IN_CLK, the load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14.

The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are transmitted from the connector CN3C to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 502.
The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied to the P / S conversion circuits 505 and 506 via the buffer circuit 513 and used for the parallel / serial conversion process.

-The serial data signal S_IN_DATAx input to the connector CN3C from the downstream side is input to the P / S conversion circuit 505 via the buffer circuit 502, and is summarized as the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 by the P / S conversion circuit 505. It is converted into serial data and input to the P / S conversion circuit 506 as a serial data signal SDT1. Further, the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 input to the connector CN7C from the downstream side are input to the P / S conversion circuit 506 via the buffer circuit 507. In the P / S conversion circuit 506, the serial data signal SDT1 from the P / S conversion circuit 505 and the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are collectively converted into serial data, and the serial data signal SDT2 is output. This serial data signal SDT2 is transmitted upstream from the connector CN2C via the buffer circuit 513 as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500.

Further, the front frame LED connection substrate 500 further has the following configuration.
-The audio signal to the speaker is relayed and transmitted to the speaker unit.
-The connector CN2C receives a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and uses it as an operating power source.
-The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) used for generating the motor drive signal are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for LED and LED driver, 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) for motor drive, and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) for motor driver. Is being prevented.
-A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are supplied to the downstream side as an operating power supply voltage.

In the front frame LED connection substrate 500, including those mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 20, resistors R1C, R2C ..., Chip resistors RA1C, RA2C ... Resistors, and capacitors C1C are located at required locations. , C2C ..., Diodes (including Zener diodes, Schottky barrier diodes) D1C, D2C ..., And other electronic elements are connected.
The damping resistance of the signal lines such as the clear signal CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signal CLK_L, CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, DATA_M, general-purpose output port signal (general-purpose signal HANYOU), and enable signal ENABLE_M is the resistance on the connector CN2C side in FIG. R8C, R10C, R12C, R13C, R14C, R16C, R17C, R18C are inserted, and chip resistors RA1C and RA2C are further inserted. That is, the waveform is formed by inserting a damping resistor in the vicinity of the connector CN2C and in front of the signal branch.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1C to TP14C are provided and used for connection with a required portion.
Although not shown, capacitors are appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground to reduce power supply noise.

[5.4 Relay board 550]

The configuration of the relay board 550 is shown in FIG. The connectors CN1D and CN2D are mounted on the relay board 550.

The connector CN1D is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H9 that connects the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 of FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1D has a 22-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 22nd pin as the numbers “1” to “22” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN3C described above. Conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of connector CN1D are also connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The connector CN2D is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H10 that connects to the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit on the downstream side.
This connector CN2D has a 20-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 20th pin as the numbers "1" to "20" are attached.

The four pins, pin 3, pin 9, pin 11, and pin 16, are ground terminals.
The first pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The two pins, the 5th pin and the 7th pin, are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

The second pin is assigned as a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx, the fourth pin is assigned as a load signal S_IN_LOAD, and the sixth pin is assigned as a clock signal S_IN_CLK.

The 8th pin is the enable signal ENABLE_L, the 10th pin is the clock signal CLK_P, the 12th pin is the reset signal RESET_P, the 13th pin is the clock signal CLK_M, the 14th pin is the data signal DATA_P, the 15th pin is the reset signal RESET_M, and the 17th pin. Pins are assigned as data signal DATA_M, pin 18 is assigned as drive general-purpose signal 1, pin 19 is assigned as enable signal ENABLE_M, and pin 20 is assigned as drive general-purpose signal 2.

In this relay board 550, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) assigned to the 3 terminals of the 5th pin, the 7th pin, and the 9th pin of the connector CN1D is applied to the 2 terminals of the 5th pin and the 7th pin on the connector CN2D side. It is aggregated in and transferred to the downstream side.
Further, in the connector CN1D, the 5 terminals of the 1st pin, the 3rd pin, the 11th pin, the 13th pin, and the 18th pin are used as ground terminals, and in the connector CN2D side, the 3rd pin, the 9th pin, and the 11th pin are used. It has 4 terminals on the 16th pin.
This reduces the number of terminals of the connector CN2D to the downstream side.
Further, the connector CN1D and the connector CN2D are assumed to have different types of connectors. The rated current per pin of the connector CN2D is larger, so that the number of power supply terminals and ground terminals of the connector CN2D can be reduced.
Further, the connector CN2D is easier to insert and remove than the connector CN1D, and the terminal is thick and the housing is large.

[5.5 Side unit upper right LED board 600]

The LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, and 29. These figures show the circuit configuration provided on the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit separately.

The connector CN1E of FIG. 24, the connector CN7E of FIG. 25, the connectors CN2E and CN3E of FIG. 26, and the connectors CN4E, CN5E and CN6E of FIG. 28 are mounted on the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit as connectors.

The connector CN1E of FIG. 24 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H10 connected to the connector CN2D of the relay board 550 of FIG. 23.
Therefore, this connector CN1E has a 20-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 20th pin as the numbers “1” to “20” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2D described above.

The connector CN7E of FIG. 25 is connected to the sensor 101S (see FIG. 55) in the side unit device 101 shown in FIG. 10, and the sense signal SENS2X is input to the third pin. The sensor 101S is, for example, a sensor that detects the operation of the player of the side unit device 101. The sense signal SENS2X of the sensor 101S is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R64E.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is a power supply voltage on the sensor 101S side of the side unit device 101, is applied to the first pin. The second pin is a ground terminal.

The connector CN2E of FIG. 26 is a 6-terminal configuration connector to which the transmission line end of the transmission line H12 connecting to the LED substrate 630 on the side unit on the downstream side is connected.
Pins 1 to 6 of this connector CN2E are assigned as a ground terminal, a clock signal CLK terminal, a data signal DATA terminal, a reset signal RESET terminal, a ground terminal, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) terminal. ..

The connector CN3E is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H11 that connects to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit on the downstream side.
This connector CN3E has a 16-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as the numbers "1" to "16" are attached.

The first pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
Pins 8 and 13 are ground terminals.
The 15th pin is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V). A Zener diode D11E is connected between the 15th pin and the ground as a protection circuit.

The 2nd pin is the clock signal CLK, the 3rd pin is the sense signal SENS1X, the 4th pin is the data signal DATA, the 5th pin is the sense signal SENS_A, the 6th pin is the reset signal RESET, and the 7th pin is the sense signal SENS_B, 9th. Pins are assigned as each terminal of the sense signal SENS_C.
As shown in FIG. 25, the sense signal SENS1X is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R13E.
Further, the sense signal SENS_A, the sense signal SENS_B, and the sense signal SENS_C are also pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via resistors R29E, R27E, and R21E, respectively.

In the connector CN3E of FIG. 26, the 10th pin is the motor drive signal MOT1-2, the 12th pin is the motor drive signal MOT1- / 1, the 14th pin is the motor drive signal MOT1-2, and the 16th pin is the motor drive signal. It is assigned as each terminal of MOT1-1.
The Zener diodes D10E, D12E, D13E, and D14E are connected as protection circuits between the 10th pin, the 12th pin, the 14th pin, the 16th pin, and the ground, respectively.

The connector CN4E of FIG. 28 is connected to the movable object motor 104 (see FIG. 10) on the upper right side of the side unit. In this connector CN4E, the first pin is a terminal of a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and the second pin is a terminal of a vibration control signal L_VIB.

The connector CN5E is connected to the movable object solenoid 105 (see FIG. 10) on the upper right side of the side unit. In this connector CN5E, the first pin is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and the second pin is a terminal for a solenoid control signal L_SOL_01.

The connector CN6E is connected to the blower 106 (see FIG. 10) on the side unit. In this connector CN6E, the first pin is a terminal for a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), and the second pin is a terminal for the blower control signal L_BRO.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN2E, CN3E, CN4E, CN5E, CN6E, and CN7E are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The power supply voltage of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit will be described.
The buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 251, the buffer circuit 604 of FIG. 26, and the buffer circuit 607 of FIG. 28 are mounted on the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit as ICs. These are Schmitt trigger buffers containing eight circuits similar to the buffer circuit 402 described above with reference to FIG.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is the voltage on the positive electrode side of the capacitor C1E via the fuse F1E with respect to the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) supplied from the first pin of the connector CN1E in FIG. 24.

Further, as the IC, the P / S conversion circuits 602 and 603 of FIG. 25 are mounted, and the power supply voltage for these is also set to 5V DC voltage (DC5V). The P / S conversion circuits 602 and 603 are ICs similar to the P / S conversion circuit 505 of FIG.

Further, as the IC, the LED driver 605 of FIG. 27 and the LED driver 606 of FIG. 28 are mounted, and as the power supply voltage for this, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 5th and 7th pins of the connector CN1E is used. Be done.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in this case is taken out as the voltage on the positive electrode side of the capacitor C2E via the fuse F2E from the 5th and 7th pins of the connector CN1E of FIG. 24.

Further, as the IC, the motor drivers 608 and 609 of FIG. 28 are mounted, and these use a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) as the power supply voltage.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
As shown in FIG. 29, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D8E is connected to the line of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). A resistor R23E, capacitors C10E, C11E, and a chip varistor 611 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D8E and the ground. With this configuration, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as the power supply voltage with overvoltage protection.
As shown in the figure, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by using a circuit with a diode D7E, a resistor R17E, and a capacitor C8E.

The flow of various signals on the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit will be described below.
Load signal S_IN_LOAD, clock signal S_IN_CLK, enable signal ENABLE_L (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal CLK_P, reset signal RESET_P, and data signal DATA_P are input to the connector CN1E in FIG. 24 from the relay board 550, and these signals are dumped. It is supplied to the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 via resistors R66E, R9E, R11E, and R12E, and is signal-compensated.
As shown in FIG. 24, the signal paths of each of these signals include the resistor R3E and the Zener diode D2E, the resistor R6E and the Zener diode D3E, the resistor R66E and the Zener diode D15E, the resistor R9E and the Zener diode D6E, and the resistor R11E and the Zener diode D5E. , A protection circuit by a resistor R12E and a Zener diode D15E is provided.

The clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P are output as the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A after being signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 601 and input to the buffer circuit 604 of FIG. In this case, the clock signal CLK_A is input to the A1 terminal and the A5 terminal, the data signal DATA_A is input to the A2 terminal and the A6 terminal, and the reset signal RESET_A is input to the A3 terminal and the A7 terminal.
Then, the signals that are buffered and output from the Y1 terminal, Y2 terminal, and Y3 terminal are output as clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET from the connector CN2E via the damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E.
Further, the signals that are buffered and output from the Y5 terminal, Y6 terminal, and Y7 terminal are output as clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET from the connector CN3E via the damping resistors R24E, R25E, and R26E.

That is, the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A shown in FIG. 26 are each branched into two systems before being input to the buffer circuit 604, and each is buffered. Then, each is output from the connectors CN2E and CN3E to separate boards as a clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET. Therefore, the buffer circuit 604 performs buffer processing while branching to two systems, and appropriate buffer processing becomes possible after each branch.
Further, the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset signal RESET output from the connectors CN2E and CN3E are originally the clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P input from the connector CN1E of FIG. 24. .. These are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 as described above, output as a clock signal CLK_A, a data signal DATA_A, and a reset signal RESET_A, and branched into two systems at the stage of the buffer circuit 604 of FIG. .. In other words, the buffer processing is performed even before branching, so that the attenuation in the transmission line up to that point is compensated before branching. A stable signal supply is realized when a common signal is distributed to two substrates.

The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A output from the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 are also supplied to the LED driver 605 of FIG.
The LED driver 605 outputs a light emission drive current corresponding to the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A.
The LED driver 605 has output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 for light emission drive current, and can output 24 systems of drive current. In this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, It uses 14 terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, LEDB4, LEDR5, and LEDG5. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to the ground.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, LEDB4, LEDR5, and LEDG5 are connected to each of the 14 LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 612. Light emission drive current (25-R1, 25-G1, 25-B1 ... 25-R5, 25-G5, 25-B5) is passed.
As shown in the figure, the LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 612 is composed of two or three LEDs (LED1, LED2, ...) Connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In this configuration, the clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P input from the connector CN1E of FIG. 24 are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 and then branched. The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A after the buffer processing are supplied to the LED driver 605 of FIG. 27 as one of the branches. The other end of the branch is supplied to the buffer circuit 604 of FIG. 26, further branched, and after buffer processing, is transmitted from the connectors CN2E and CN3E to the downstream board.
In this case, the signal for light emission drive control is buffered by the buffer circuit 601 and then branched for transmission to the LED driver and the downstream board, so that stable transmission is performed and the buffer circuit configuration is made efficient. It has become.

Further, the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_M output from the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 are supplied to the LED driver 606 of FIG. 28.
The LED driver 606 is a device that outputs a light emission drive current corresponding to the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_M. In this case, the LED driver 606 mainly functions as a serial / parallel conversion circuit for driving the motor. The LED driver 606 has LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 output terminals for light emission drive current, and can output 24 drive currents. In this case, the output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, It uses 7 terminals of LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, and LEDG3. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to the ground.
And the output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3 output (current 30-G1, 30-B1, 30-R2, 30-G2, 30-B2, 30-R3, 30-G3) After being buffered by the buffer circuit 607, it is supplied to the input terminals IN2, IN3, IN4 of the motor driver 608 and the input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4 of the motor driver 609.

The output terminals LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, and LEDG3 are connected to a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via resistors R60E, R61E, R62E, R56E, R57E, R58E, and R59E. This is because the currents 30-G1, 30-B1, 30-R2, 30-G2, 30-B2, 30-R3, and 30-G3 are passed using the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) as the power source.

The motor driver 608 outputs blower control signal L_BRO, solenoid control signal L_SOL01, and vibration control signal L_VIB from output terminals OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4 based on the signals of input terminals IN2, IN3, and IN4. These blower control signals L_BRO, solenoid control signal L_SOL01, and vibration control signal L_VIB are supplied to the connectors CN6E, CN5E, and CN4E, respectively.

The motor driver 609 outputs the motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1- / 1, MOT1- / 2 from the output terminals OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 based on the signals of the input terminals IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4. Output. These motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1- / 1, and MOT1- / 2 are supplied to the connector CN3E of FIG. 26.
Therefore, the circuit from the LED driver 605 to the motor driver 609 is a circuit system that generates a motor drive signal of the LED board 620 on the lower right side of the side unit on the downstream side in the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit.

The load signal S_IN_LOAD and the clock signal S_IN_CLK input from the connector CN1E of FIG. 24 are signal-compensated by the buffer circuit 601 of FIG. 25 via the damping resistors R3E and R6E, and then the P / S conversion circuits 602 and 603, respectively. It is input to the CLR / LOAD terminal and CK terminal to control parallel / serial conversion processing.
In the P / S conversion circuit 602,603, the P / S CONT terminal = H is set by applying a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) to the P / S CONT terminal, and the Q / D1 terminal to the Q / D8 terminal 8 The terminals are parallel inputs.

In the Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P / S conversion circuit 603, the Q / D1 terminal has a sense signal SENS_C, the Q / D2 terminal has a sense signal SENS_B, and the Q / D4 terminal has a sense signal SENS_A. , The sense signal SENS1X is input to the Q / D4 terminal, and the sense signal SENS2X is input to the Q / D5 terminal.
The Q / D6 terminal, Q / D7 terminal, and Q / D8 terminal are connected to the ground.
The sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, and SENS1X are input from the connector CN3E. The sense signal SENS2X is input from the connector CN7E.

The P / S conversion circuit 603 collectively converts the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X input as described above into serial data (serial data signal SDT3) and outputs them from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT3 is input to the SI terminal of the P / S conversion circuit 602.

In the Q / D1 terminal to Q / D8 terminal, which are parallel input terminals of the P / S conversion circuit 602, 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied to the Q / D1 terminal, Q / D2 terminal, and Q / D8 terminal, and others. Is connected to the ground.
The P / S conversion circuit 602 collectively collects serial data (serial) of the serial data signal SDT3 from the P / S conversion circuit 603 input to the SI terminal and the logic (H / L) of the Q / D1 terminal to the Q / D8 terminal. It is converted to a data signal SDT4) and output from the Q8 terminal. This serial data signal SDT4 is input to the buffer circuit 601 and buffered. This output is transmitted as a serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit from the connector CN1E to the upstream side via the damping resistor R1E of FIG. 24.

As described above, the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit has the following configuration.
-The enable signal ENABLE_L (reset signal RESET_M), the clock signal CLK_P, the reset signal RESET_P, and the data signal DATA_P are input, and the buffer circuit 601 performs buffer processing for these. The signal after the buffer processing is used for LED light emission, used for generating a motor drive signal, or transferred to the downstream side.

The clock signal S_IN_CLK and the load signal S_IN_LOAD are supplied to the P / S conversion circuits 602 and 603 via the buffer circuit 601 and used for the parallel / serial conversion process.
-Various sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X are collectively converted into serial data to generate the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx. This serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is transmitted to the upstream side. As described above, this serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is further converted into serial data together with the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS1 on the front frame LED connection board 500, and is used as the serial data signal S_IN_DATA to form the inner frame LED relay board 400. It will be transmitted to the effect control board 30 via.

-The connector CN1E receives a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and uses it as an operating power source.
-The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) used for generating the motor drive signal are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
-A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) are supplied to the downstream side as an operating power supply voltage.

In the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, including those mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, resistors R1E, R2E ..., capacitors C1E, C2E ..., and diodes (Zener diodes) are located at required locations. ) Electronic elements such as D1E, D2E ... Are connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1E, TP2E ... Are provided and used for connection with a required portion.
Although not shown, capacitors are appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground to reduce power supply noise.

[5.6 Side unit lower right LED board 620]

The lower right LED substrate 620 of the side unit will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. These figures show the circuit configuration provided on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit separately.

The connectors CN1F, CN3F, CN4F, and the connector CN2F of FIG. 31 of FIG. 30 are mounted on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit as connectors.

The connector CN3F of FIG. 30 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H11 connected to the connector CN3E of the LED board 600 on the upper right side unit of FIG. 26.
Therefore, this connector CN3F has a 16-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 16th pin as the numbers “1” to “16” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN3E described above.

The connector CN1F is connected to the lower right movable object motor 103 of the side unit shown in FIG.
A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied to the 3rd and 4th pins. From the 1st pin, the 2nd pin, the 5th pin, and the 6th pin, the motor drive signals MOT1- / 2, MOT1- / 1, MOT1-2, and MOT1-1 input from the connector CN3F are output.

The connector CN4F is connected to the movable object position detection switch 102 at the lower right of the side unit shown in FIG.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. The third pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS1X from the connected position detection switch.

The connector CN2F of FIG. 31 is connected to an LED substrate 625 (not shown in FIG. 11, see FIG. 55) arranged on the side unit 10. The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). Pins 2 to 5 serve as terminals for light emission drive signals.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN1F, CN2F, CN3F, and CN4F are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The power supply voltage on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit will be described.
Photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F are mounted on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply voltage for these. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the first pin of the connector CN3F.

Further, the LED driver 621 of FIG. 31 is mounted as an IC on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the 11th pin of the connector CN1E is used as the power supply voltage for the LED driver 621. ..
Further, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) output from the connector CN1F of FIG. 30 is supplied from the 15th pin of the connector CN3F.

The flow of various signals on the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit will be described.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN3F from the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 621 of FIG. 31.
The LED driver 621 outputs a light emission drive current corresponding to the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 621 has LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 output terminals for light emission drive current, and can output 24 drive currents. In this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LED light emission drive is performed using 12 terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, and LEDB4. Further, the LED emission drive of the LED substrate (not shown) connected to the connector CN2F is performed by using the four output terminals LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to the ground.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, LEDB3, LEDR4, LEDG4, and LEDB4 are connected to each of the 12 LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 622, and the light emitting drive current (light emitting drive current) 27-R1, 27-G1, 27-B1 ・ ・ ・ 27-R4, 27-G4, 27-B4).
As shown in the figure, the LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 622 is composed of one or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.
The output terminals LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8 are connected to four systems of the light emitting drive unit 623. The light emitting drive unit 623 outputs four light emitting drive currents (27-R7, 27-G7, 27-B7 ... 27-R8) from the connector CN2F.

The sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C can be obtained by the photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F of FIG. These are transmitted from the connector CN3F to the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit.
The sense signal SENS1X obtained from the connector CN4F is also transmitted from the connector CN3F to the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit.
These sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, and SENS1X are serialized as described above.

In the lower right LED substrate 620 of the side unit, including those mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, electronic elements such as resistors R1F, R2F ..., Capacitors C1F, C2F ... Is connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1F, TP2F ... Are provided and used for connection with a required location.

[5.7 LED board on side unit 630]

The LED substrate 630 on the side unit will be described with reference to FIG.
The connector CN1T is mounted on the LED board 630 on the side unit.
The connector CN1T is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H12 connected to the connector CN2E of the LED board 600 on the upper right side unit of FIG. 26.

Therefore, this connector CN1T has a 6-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 6th pin as the numbers “1” to “6” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2E described above.
The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connector CN1T are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

An LED driver 631 is mounted on the LED substrate 630 on the side unit as an IC, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the sixth pin of the connector CN1T is used as the power supply voltage for the LED driver 631.

The flow of various signals will be described.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN1T from the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 631.
The LED driver 631 outputs a light emission drive current corresponding to the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 631 has LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 output terminals for light emission drive current, and can output 24 drive currents. In this case, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LED light emission drive is performed using 9 terminals of LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, and LEDB3. As shown, the other output terminals are connected to the ground.

The output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1, LEDR2, LEDG2, LEDB2, LEDR3, LEDG3, and LEDB3 are connected to each of the nine LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 632, and the light emitting drive current (27-R1, 27-). G1, 27-B1 ・ ・ ・ 27-R3, 27-G3, 27-B3) is played.
As shown in the figure, the LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 632 is composed of two LEDs connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In the LED substrate 630 on the side unit, electronic elements such as resistors R1T, R2T ..., Capacitors C1T, C2T ... Are connected to required locations as shown in FIG. 32, including those mentioned above. ..
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1T, TP2T ... Are provided and used for connection with a required portion.

[5.8 Button LED Connection Board 640]

The button LED connection board 640 will be described with reference to FIG. 33.
The button LED connection board 640 is equipped with connectors CN1G, CN2G, CN3G, CN4G, CN5G, CN6G, and CN8G as connectors.

The connector CN1G is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H15 that connects the connector CN10C of the front frame LED connection board 500 of FIG. 20.
Therefore, this connector CN1E has a 20-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 20th pin as the numbers “1” to “20” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN10C described above.

The connector CN2G is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H16 connected to the button LED substrate 660 shown in FIG.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is a power supply voltage for the button LED substrate 660, is applied to the 3rd and 7th pins. Pins 1 and 6 are ground terminals.
The second pin, the fourth pin, and the fifth pin are terminals for the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET, respectively.

The connector CN3G is connected to a motor (not shown).
The motor drive signals MOTφ1, MOTφ / 1, MOTφ2, and MOTφ / 2 input from the connector CN1G are output from the 6th pin, the 2nd pin, the 5th pin, and the 1st pin of the connector CN3G.
Further, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) input from the connector CN1G is applied to the 3rd and 4th pins as the illustrated 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12VA).

The connector CN4G is connected to a vibrating device (not shown). A 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12VA) is applied to the first pin as the power supply voltage of the vibrating device, and the motor drive signal DCMOT3 input from the connector CN1G is output to the second pin as the driving signal of the vibrating device. A DC motor is used as the vibration device.

The connector CN5G is connected to the push button sensor in the effect button 13.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the second pin is a ground terminal. The third pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS8 from the connected pushbutton sensor.

The connector CN6G is connected to the rotation origin sensor.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS9 from the connected rotation origin sensor.

The connector CN8G is connected to the rotation effect light sensor.
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENS11 from the connected rotation effect light sensor.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN1G, CN2G, CN3G, CN4G, CN5G, CN6G, and CN8G are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

A buffer circuit 641 is mounted on the button LED connection board 640. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 8th pin of the connector CN1G.

The flow of various signals in the button LED connection board 640 will be described.
The clock signal CLK_L, the clear signal CLR_L, and the data signal DATA_L supplied from the upstream front frame LED connection board 500 to the connector CN1G are input to the buffer circuit 641 via the chip resistor RA1G and buffered. Then, it is sent to the connector CN2G via the chip resistor RA2G, and is transmitted to the downstream button LED board 660.
A capacitor C1G is inserted between the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) of the buffer circuit 641 and the ground.

Although not shown, in the button LED connection board 640, a capacitor for reducing power supply noise and the like is appropriately arranged between the power supply line of DC 5V or DC 12V and the ground.

[5.9 Button LED Board 660]

The button LED substrate 660 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. These figures show the circuit configuration provided on the button LED board 660 separately.

Button LED board 660 The connector CN1H shown in FIG. 34 is mounted.
The connector CN1H is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H16 connected to the connector CN2G of the button LED connection board 640 of FIG. 33.
Therefore, this connector CN1H has a 7-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 7th pin as the numbers “1” to “7” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2G described above.
Further, the conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connector CN1H are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the button LED board 660 as a power supply voltage input to the connector CN1H.
The LED driver 661 of FIG. 34 and the LED driver 663 of FIG. 35 are mounted on the button LED substrate 660 as ICs, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for the LED driver 661.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is also used as the power supply voltage for the light emitting units 664 and 662.

The flow of various signals on the button LED substrate 660 will be described.
A clock signal CLK, a data signal DATA, and a reset signal RESET are input to the connector CN1H from the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, and these signals are supplied to the LED driver 661 via the chip resistor RA1H of FIG. 34.
The LED driver 661 outputs a light emission drive current corresponding to the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET.

The LED driver 661 uses the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, and LEDB8 of the light emission drive current to drive 24 systems of LED light emission.
That is, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR8, LEDG8, LEDB8 are connected to each of the 24 LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 662, and the light emitting drive current (19-R1, 19-G1, 19). -B1 ・ ・ ・ 19-R8, 19-G8, 19-B8) is played.
As shown in the figure, the LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 662 is composed of two or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

The clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET are also supplied to the LED driver 663 of FIG.
The LED driver 663 uses three terminals each of the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR6, LEDG6, and LEDB6 of the light emission drive current to drive six systems of LED light emission.
That is, the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR6, LEDG6, LEDB6 are connected to each of the six LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 664, and the light emitting drive current (20-R1, 20-G1, 20). -B1 ・ ・ ・ 20-R6, 20-G6, 20-B6) is played.
As shown in the figure, the LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 664 is composed of two or three LEDs connected in series and a resistance element. A Zener diode is connected in parallel to each LED. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

In the LED substrate 620 at the lower right of the side unit, in addition to those mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, resistors R1H, R2H ..., capacitors C1H, C2H ..., And diodes (Zener) are located at required locations. Electronic elements such as D1H, D2H ... (including diodes) are connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1H, TP2H ... Are provided and used for connection with a required portion.

[5.10 LED connection board 700]

Next, the substrate arranged on the game board 3 side will be described.
First, the LED connection substrate 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, and 41. These figures show the circuit configurations provided on the LED connection board 700 separately.
As shown in FIG. 11, the LED connection board 700 is a board connected to the effect control board 30 on the game board 3.

The LED connection board 700 has connectors CN1J in FIG. 36, connectors CN5J and CN6J in FIG. 37, connectors CN2J, CN3J, CN4J, CN12J in FIG. 38, connectors CN10J in FIG. 41 connectors CN8J and CN9J are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the connector CN1J of FIG. 36 is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H20 connected to the effect control board 30.
This connector CN1J has a 40-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 40th pin as the numbers "1" to "40" are attached.

1st pin, 2nd pin, 8th pin, 9th pin, 10th pin, 16th pin, 18th pin, 19th pin, 20th pin, 22nd pin, 29th pin, 31st pin of connector CN1J , 32nd pin, 33rd pin, 34th pin, 39th pin, and 40th pin are connected to the ground.
The 4th and 6th pins are terminals for a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
The 12th pin, the 14th pin, the 24th pin, the 26th pin, the 28th pin, and the 30th pin are terminals for a 12V direct current voltage (DC12VB).
The 11th pin, the 17th pin, the 35th pin, and the 37th pin are unused.

The third pin is assigned as a clock signal P_S_IN_CLK, the fifth pin is assigned as a serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA, and the seventh pin is assigned as a load signal P_S_IN_LOAD terminal.
The serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA is serial data transmitted from the LED connection board 700 to the effect control board 30, and the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are supplied from the effect control board 30 for transmission of the serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA. It is a signal.

Pin 13 is assigned as a clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK, and pin 15 is assigned as a terminal of a serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA.
The serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA is serial data transmitted from the effect control board 30 together with the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK.

Pin 21 is the clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), pin 23 is the clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), pin 25 is the serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and pin 27 is the enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch). It is assigned as each terminal of the signal LATCH_M).
The serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA is serial data transmitted from the effect control board 30 together with the clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connector CN1J and the connectors CN2J, CN3J, CN4J, CN5J, CN6J, CN7J, CN8J, CN9J, CN10J, CN11J, and CN12J described later are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The connector CN5J of FIG. 37 is connected to a motor of a movable object (not shown). An 18V DC voltage (MOT18VA), which is the power supply voltage of the motor, is applied to the 3rd and 4th pins.
The first pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT6- / 2, the second pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT6- / 1, the fifth pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT6-2, and the sixth pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT6-1. Has been done.

The connector CN6J of FIG. 37 is also connected to a motor of another movable object (not shown). An 18V DC voltage (MOT18VA), which is the power supply voltage of the motor, is applied to the 3rd and 4th pins.
The 1st pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT7- / 2, the 2nd pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT7- / 1, the 5th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT7-2, and the 6th pin is assigned as the motor drive signal MOT7-1. Has been done.

The connector CN2J of FIG. 38 is connected to the position detection switch of the accessory. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is a power supply voltage on the position detection switch side, is applied to the first pin. The third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, a sense signal SENSv0, which is a detection signal of the lower back movable object right position detection switch 121 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of the connector CN2J. The sense signal SENSv0 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R5J.

The connector CN4J is also connected to the position detection switch of the accessory, the first pin is a terminal of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) which is the power supply voltage on the position detection switch side, and the third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, a sense signal SENSv1 which is a detection signal of the lower back movable object left position detection switch 125 (see FIG. 10) is input to the second pin of the connector CN4J. The sense signal SENSv1 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R29J.

The connector CN12J is also connected to the position detection switch of the accessory, the first pin is a terminal of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) which is the power supply voltage on the position detection switch side, and the third pin is a ground terminal.
For example, a sense signal SENSv9, which is a detection signal of the lower back movable object upper position detection switch 120 (see FIG. 10), is input to the second pin of the connector CN12J. The sense signal SENSv9 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R31J.

The connector CN3J is connected to the power supply module board 904 of FIG. Pins 1 and 2 and 4 are 18V DC voltage Vout, pins 7 and 9 and 10 are 35V DC voltage (DC35V), and pins 5 and 6 and 8 are ground. Used as each terminal.

The connector CN10J of FIG. 39 is connected to a relay board (not shown). As shown by the numbers "1" to "32", the 1st pin has a 32 terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 32nd pin. The 1st pin is a terminal to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied via a fuse F6J. Pin 2 is a terminal to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied via a fuse F9J, and pins 3 and 4 and 5 are terminals to which a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied.
The 9th pin, the 13th pin, the 17th pin, the 21st pin, the 25th pin, the 27th pin, the 29th pin, the 30th pin, the 31st pin, and the 32nd pin are connected to the ground.

Pin 7 is the motor drive signal MOT1- / 2, pin 8 is the motor drive signal MOT1- / 1, pin 10 is the motor drive signal MOT1-2, and pin 12 is the motor drive signal MOT1-1. Has been done.
Pin 14 is the motor drive signal MOT2- / 2, pin 16 is the motor drive signal MOT2- / 1, pin 18 is the motor drive signal MOT2-2, and pin 20 is the motor drive signal MOT2-1. Has been done.
Pin 22 is the motor drive signal MOT3- / 2, pin 24 is the motor drive signal MOT3- / 1, pin 26 is the motor drive signal MOT3-2, and pin 28 is the motor drive signal MOT3-1. Has been done.

The 7th pin is the terminal of the clock signal CLK_B, and the 11th pin is the terminal of the data signal DATA_B. The 15th pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv2, the 19th pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv3, and the 23rd pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv4.
The sense signal SENSv2 is, for example, the detection signal of the upper movable object position detection switch 132 in FIG. 10, the sense signal SENSv3 is, for example, the detection signal of the upper movable object left position detection switch 130, and the sense signal SENSv4 is, for example, the detection of the left movable object position detection switch 134. It is a signal.

The connector CN7J of FIG. 40 is connected to an LED substrate (not shown). The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). Pins 5 and 6 are terminals for 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V). Pins 4, 7, and 8 are connected to ground.
The second pin is the terminal of the clock signal CLK_E, and the third pin is the terminal of the data signal DATA_E.

The connector CN11J is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H30 connected to the board back bottom relay board 800 shown in FIG. It is a 16-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 16th pin as the numbers "1" to "16" are attached.

Pins 4 and 6 are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied via a fuse F10J, and pins 7 and 9 are terminals to which a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied via a fuse F11J. Is.
Pins 1, 15 and 16 are connected to ground.

Pin 3 is the motor drive signal MOT4- / 2, pin 5 is the motor drive signal MOT4- / 1, pin 11 is the motor drive signal MOT4-2, and pin 13 is the motor drive signal MOT4-1. NS.
The 14th pin is a terminal of the sense signal SENSv7. The sense signal SENSv7 is, for example, a detection signal of the lower front movable object position detection switch 123 in FIG.
The 2nd pin, the 8th pin, the 10th pin, and the 12th pin are terminals of the light emitting drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.

The connector CN9J of FIG. 41 is connected to an LED substrate (not shown). The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). The tenth pin is a terminal of 5V DC voltage (DC5V). Pins 4 and 9 are connected to the ground.
The second pin is the terminal of the clock signal CLK_D, and the third pin is the terminal of the data signal DATA_D.
The 8th pin, the 7th pin, the 6th pin, and the 5th pin are terminals of the light emitting drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.
The 14th pin is a terminal of the sense signal SENSv8. The sense signal SENSv8 is, for example, a detection signal of the distribution position detection switch 122 of FIG.

The connector CN8J is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H21 connected to the board back left relay board 720 shown in FIG. It is a 24-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 24th pin as the numbers "1" to "24" are attached.

Pins 1 to 4 are terminals to which an 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) is applied via a fuse F12J, and pins 5 and 9 are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied via a fuse F7J. Pin 11 is a terminal to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is applied via a fuse F8J.
The 7th pin, the 13th pin, the 14th pin, the 19th pin, and the 20th pin are connected to the ground.

The 15th pin is the terminal of the clock signal CLK_C, and the 17th pin is the terminal of the data signal DATA_C.
Pins 6 and 8 are motor drive signals MOT5- / 2, pins 10 and 12 are motor drive signals MOT5- / 1, pins 16 and 18 are motor drive signals MOT5-2, and pins 22 and 24. Are the terminals of the motor drive signal MOT5-1. In this case, the driving motor is a high torque motor and is driven by the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB). Since the power consumption is high, the motor drive signals MOT5- / 2, MOT5- / 1, MOT5-2, and MOT5-1 each use two pins / lines.
The 21st pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv6, and the 23rd pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv5. The sense signal SENSv6 is, for example, the detection signal of the lower left position detection switch 128 of the lower back movable object in FIG. 10, and the sense signal SENSv5 is, for example, the detection signal of the lower right position detection switch 127 of the lower back movable object.

The power supply voltage of the LED connection board 700 will be described.
The LED connection board 700 has the buffer circuits 703 and 704 of FIG. 36, which are Schmitt trigger buffers containing eight circuits similar to the buffer circuit 402 described above, and the buffer of FIG. 39, which is a triple buffer gate, as ICs. The circuit 705 and the buffer circuits 707 and 708 of FIG. 41 are mounted.
As the power supply voltage for these, as shown in FIG. 36, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) based on the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the connector CN1J is used.

Further, as the IC, the P / S conversion circuits 701 and 702 of FIG. 36 are mounted, and a power supply voltage for these is also a 5V DC voltage (DC5V). The 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is taken out from the positive electrode side of the capacitor C4J from the connector CN1J via the fuse F1J. The P / S conversion circuits 701 and 702 are ICs similar to the P / S conversion circuit 505 of FIG.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) output downstream from the connectors CN2J, CN4J, CN7J, CN8J, CN10J, CN11J, and CN12J is taken out from the positive electrode side of the capacitor C5J via the fuse F2J from the connector CN1J.

Further, the motor driver 710 to 713 of FIG. 37 is mounted on the LED connection board 700 as an IC, and a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used as the power supply voltage for these.
Further, motor drivers 714, 715 and 716 are mounted, and 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used as the power supply voltage for these.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the power supply separation / protection circuit 790.
As shown in FIG. 36, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D5J is connected to the 12th pin, 14th pin, 24th pin, 26th pin, 28th pin, and 30th pin of the connector CN1J. .. A resistor R6J, capacitors C14J, C15J, and a chip varistor 709 are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D5J and the ground. With this configuration as the power supply separation / protection circuit 790, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as the power supply voltage with overvoltage protection.

The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by using a circuit with a diode D1J, a resistor R1J, and a capacitor C3J shown in FIG. 38.

The 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA), 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB), and 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) are also separated from the 18V DC voltage Vout input from the connector CN3J, as also shown in FIG.
The anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D7J is connected to the first pin, the second pin, and the fourth pin to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied via the fuse F3J. A resistor R7J, capacitors C17J, and C18J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D7J and the ground. With this configuration, the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VA) is taken out.
Further, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D9J is connected to the first pin, the second pin, and the fourth pin to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied via the fuse F4J. A resistor R8J, capacitors C20J, and C21J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D9J and the ground. With this configuration, the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) is taken out.
Further, the anode side of the Schottky barrier diode D11J is connected to the first pin, the second pin, and the fourth pin to which the 18V DC voltage Vout is applied via the fuse F5J. A resistor R9J, capacitors C23J, and C24J are connected in parallel between the cathode side of the Schottky barrier diode D11J and the ground. With this configuration, the 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) is taken out.

The flow of various signals on the LED connection board 700 will be described below.
The clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are transmitted from the effect control board 30 to the connector CN1J of FIG. 36. These are signals used for operation control downstream of the LED connection board 700.

The clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are input to the A5 terminal and the A7 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 as shown as the clock signal CLK_P and the serial data signal DATA_P in FIG. 36 to compensate for the signals.
Then, it is output from the Y5 terminal and the Y7 terminal of the buffer circuit 703, is input to the buffer circuit 706 of FIG. 40 as shown as a clock signal CLK_A and a serial data signal DATA_A, and is buffered. Then, it is transmitted from the connector CN7J to the downstream side as shown as a clock signal CLK_E and a serial data signal DATA_E.

Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A output from the Y5 terminal and the Y7 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 are also input to the buffer circuit 705 of FIG. 39 and buffered, and the clock signal CLK_B and the serial data signal are processed from the connector CN10J. It is sent to the downstream side as DATA_B.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are also input to the buffer circuit 707 of FIG. 41 for buffer processing, and are transmitted from the connector CN9J to the downstream side as the clock signal CLK_D and the serial data signal DATA_D.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are input to the buffer circuit 708 of FIG. 41 and buffered, and are transmitted from the connector CN8J to the downstream board back left relay board 720 as the clock signal CLK_C and the serial data signal DATA_C. Will be done.

The connector CN1J of FIG. 36 has a clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), a clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), a serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and an enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch signal LATCH_M) from the effect control board 30. ) Is sent.
These are used for control for driving the motor.
These signals are input to the A7 terminal, A1 terminal, A3 terminal, and A5 terminal of the buffer circuit 704 to compensate for the signal. Then, it is input to the motor drivers 71 to 716 of FIG. 37 via the chip resistor RA4J, respectively.
That is, in each of the motor drivers 710 to 716, the reset signal RESET_M is input to the RESET terminal, the latch signal LATCH_M is input to the LATCH terminal, the clock signal CLK_M is input to the SCLK terminal, and the serial data signal DATA_M is input to the SDIN terminal.

The motor drivers 710 to 713 generate 12V-type motor drive signals in response to these inputs.
That is, the motor driver 710 generates the motor drive signals MOT1-2, MOT1- / 1, MOT1-2, and MOT1-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 711 generates motor drive signals MOT2- / 2, MOT2- / 1, MOT2-2, and MOT2-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 712 generates motor drive signals MOT3- / 1, MOT3-2, and MOT3-1 output from the connector CN10J.
The motor driver 713 generates motor drive signals MOT4- / 2, MOT4- / 1, MOT4-2, and MOT4-1 output from the connector CN11J.

The motor drivers 714 to 716 also generate 18V motor drive signals in response to the inputs of the reset signal RESET_M, the latch signal LATCH_M, the clock signal CLK_M, and the serial data signal DATA_M.
That is, the motor driver 714 generates the motor drive signals MOT5- / 2, MOT5- / 1, MOT5-2, and MOT5-1 output from the connector CN8J.
The motor driver 715 generates motor drive signals MOT6- / 2, MOT6- / 1, MOT6-2, and MOT6-1 output from the connector CN5J.
The motor driver 716 generates motor drive signals MOT7- / 2, MOT7- / 1, MOT7-2, and MOT7-1 output from the connector CN6J.

The clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are transmitted from the effect control board 30 to the connector CN1J of FIG. 36.
The clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD are input to the A3 terminal and the A2 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 to compensate for the signals. Then, it is input from the Y3 terminal and Y2 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 to the CK terminal and CLR / LOAD terminal of the P / S conversion circuits 701 and 702 via the chip resistor RA1J.
When a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied to the P / S CONT terminals of the P / S conversion circuits 701 and 702, the P / S CONT terminal = H, and the Q / D1 terminal to the Q / D8 terminal The 8 terminals are parallel inputs. Then, the P / S conversion circuits 701 and 702 perform parallel-serial conversion according to the clock signal P_S_IN_CLK and the load signal P_S_IN_LOAD.

The sense signal SENSv8 from the connector CN9J of FIG. 41 is input to the Q / D1 terminal of the P / S conversion circuit 701. As shown in FIG. 36, this sense signal SENSv8 is pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via a resistor R23J.
Further, the sense signal SENSv9 from the connector CN12J of FIG. 38 is input to the Q / D2 terminal of the P / S conversion circuit 701.
The inputs of the Q / D3 terminal to the Q / D7 terminal are set to the ground level "0" (L level), and the Q / D8 terminal is set to the 5V level "1" (H level).
The P / S conversion circuit 702 converts the above parallel input into serial data (serial data signal SDT5) and outputs it from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT5 is input to the SI terminal of the P / S conversion circuit 702.

Sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv7 are input to the 8 terminals of the Q / D1 terminal to the Q / D8 terminal of the P / S conversion circuit 702. The sense signal SENSv0 is input from the connector CN2J. The sense signal SENSv1 is input from the connector CN4J. The sense signals SENSv2 to SENSv4 are input from the connector CN10J. The sense signals SENSv5 and SENSv6 are input from the connector CN8J. The sense signals SENSv5 and SENSv7 are input from the connector CN11J.
The sense signals SENSv2 to SENSv7 are pulled up by a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) via resistors R24J, R2J, and chip resistors RA3J, respectively.

The P / S conversion circuit 702 collectively converts the serial data signal SDT5 from the P / S conversion circuit 701 input to the SI terminal and the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv7 into serial data (serial data signal SDT6). Output from the Q8C terminal. This serial data signal SDT6 is input to the A1 terminal of the buffer circuit 703 and buffered. Then, the Y1 output is supplied to the third pin of the connector CN1J via the chip resistor RA1J, and is transmitted to the upstream effect control board 30 as a serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA from the LED connection board 700.

As described above, the LED connection board 700 has the following configuration.
-The sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9 input from the downstream side are converted into serial data and transmitted as serial data signals P_S_IN_DATA from the connector CN1J to the upstream side via the buffer circuit 703.
-The clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA transmitted from the effect control board 30 are transferred to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703 and the buffer circuit (any of 705, 706, 707, 708).

-The clear signal M_S_CLR (reset signal RESET_M), clock signal M_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_M), serial data signal M_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal DATA_M), and enable signal M_S_ENABLEP (latch signal LATCH_M) transmitted from the effect control board 30 are buffered. It is supplied to the motor drivers 710 to 716 via the circuit 704, and the motor drive signals (MOT1- / 2, MOT1- / 1, MOT1-2, MOT1-1 ... MOT7- / 2, MOT7- / 1, MOT7- 2. Generate MOT7-1) and send it to the downstream side (motor).

-The connector CN1J receives a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) and uses it as an operating power source.
-The 18V DC voltage Vout is received by the connector CN3J and used as the operating power supply for the 18V system (the operating power supply for high-brightness LEDs and high-torque motors).
12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5V), 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V), 18V LED drive voltage (LED18V) are supplied to the downstream side as operating power supply voltage.

In the LED connection board 700, including those mentioned above, as shown in FIGS. 36 to 41, resistors R1J, R2J ..., Chip resistors RA1J, RA2J ... Resistors, capacitors C1J, C2J ... ..., An electronic element such as a diode (including a Zener diode and a Schottky barrier diode) D1J, D2J ... Is connected.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1J, TP2J ... Are provided and used for connection with a required portion.
Although not shown, capacitors are appropriately arranged between the DC 5V or DC 12V power supply line and the ground to reduce power supply noise.

[5.11 Board back left relay board 720]

The configuration of the back left relay board 720 is shown in FIG. 42. The connectors CN1K and CN2K are mounted on the back left relay board 720.

The connector CN1K is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H21 connected to the connector CN8J of the LED connection board 700 of FIG. 41.
Therefore, this connector CN1K has a 24-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 24th pin as the numbers "1" to "24" are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN8J described above.

The connector CN2K is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H22 that connects to the decorative substrate 740 on the downstream side.
This connector CN1B has a 22-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 22nd pin as the numbers "1" to "22" are attached.

Pins 4, 7, and 10 are ground terminals.
The sixth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V).
The 8th and 9th pins are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 11th pin, the 12th pin, the 13th pin, and the 14th pin are terminals for the 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB).

The fifth pin is the terminal of the clock signal CLK_C, and the third pin is the terminal of the data signal DATA_C.
Pins 15 and 16 are motor drive signals MOT5- / 2, pins 17 and 18 are motor drive signals MOT5- / 1, pins 19 and 20 are motor drive signals MOT5-2, and pins 21 and 22. Are the terminals of the motor drive signal MOT5-1.
The second pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv6, and the first pin is the terminal of the sense signal SENSv5.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connectors CN1K and CN2K are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

In this board back left relay board 720, the ground terminals of the 7th pin, 13th pin, 14th pin, 19th pin, and 20th pin of the connector CN1K are connected to the 4th pin, 7th pin, and 10th pin on the connector CN2K side. As the 3 terminals of the pin, the connector is converted from 24 terminals to 22 terminals. This reduces the number of terminals of the connector CN2D to the downstream side.

[5.12 Decorative board 740]

The decorative substrate 740 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
The connectors CN1L, CN2L, CN3L, CN4L, CN5L, and CN6L are mounted on the decorative substrate 740.

The connector CN1L is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H22 that connects the connector CN2K of the back left relay board 720 of FIG. 42.
Therefore, this connector CN1L has a 22-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 22nd pin as the numbers “1” to “22” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN2K described above.
The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housings of the connectors CN1K to CN6K are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The connector CN2L is connected to a position detection switch for a movable object (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv5 from the connected position detection switch.

The connector CN3L is connected to another position detection switch of a movable object (not shown).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv6 from the connected position detection switch.

The connector CN4L is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H23 connected to the relay board 760 shown in FIG. As shown by the numbers "1" to "14", it has a 14-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 14th pin.

The 1st pin, the 2nd pin, and the 3rd pin are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied, and the 12th, 13th, and 14th pins are terminals to which a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is applied.
The 4th pin, the 5th pin, the 7th pin, the 8th pin, the 10th pin, and the 11th pin are connected to the ground.
The sixth pin is the terminal of the clock signal CLK_C, and the ninth pin is the terminal of the data signal DATA_C.
A flexible cable (for example, a flexible flat cable) is connected to the connector CN4L as a transmission line H23, but since the flexible cable has a small rated current, the number of power supply terminals and ground terminals is larger than that of the connector CN1L.

The connector CN5L is connected to a motor of a movable object (not shown).
Pins 3 and 4 are terminals to which an 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V) is applied.
The first pin is the motor drive signal MOT5- / 2, the second pin is the motor drive signal MOT5- / 1, the fifth pin is the motor drive signal MOT5-2, and the sixth pin is the motor drive signal MOT5-1. NS.

The connector CN6L is connected to an LED substrate of a movable object (not shown).
The first pin and the second pin are terminals to which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied.
The 3rd to 24th pins are 22 systems of light emitting drive current terminals up to 09-R1, 09-G1, 09-B1 ... 09-R8, 09-G8.

A buffer circuit 741 which is a triple buffer gate is mounted on the decorative substrate 740. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 6th pin of the connector CN1L.

Further, the LED driver 742 is mounted, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for the LED driver 742. The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the 8th and 9th pins of the connector CN1L.

The 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18V) supplied from the connector CN5L to the downstream side is obtained from the 11th to 14th pins of the connector CN1L.

The flow of various signals in the decorative substrate 740 will be described.
The clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C supplied from the upstream board back left relay board 720 to the connector CN1L are input to the buffer circuit 741 and buffered. Then, it is sent to the connector CN4L and sent to the downstream relay board 760.

The clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are also supplied to the LED driver 742.
The LED driver 742 uses the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDR8, and LEDG8 of the light emission drive current to drive 22 systems of LED light emission.
These output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDR8, LEDG8 are connected to pins 3 to 24 of the connector CN6L, and for 22 LED circuits in the LED board of a movable object (not shown). The light emitting drive current (09-R1, 09-G1, 09-B1 ... 09-R6, 09-G6, 09-B6) is applied.

As described above, the decorative substrate 740 has the following configuration.
-The clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C transmitted from the upstream are transferred to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703.
-The clock signal CLK and the data signal DATA are also used in the LED driver 742. The LED driver 742 drives the light emitting part of another LED substrate to emit light.

-The connector CN1L receives a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) and uses it as an operating power source.
-A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and an 18V motor drive voltage (MOT18VB) are supplied to the downstream side as an operating power supply voltage.

In the decorative substrate 740, in addition to those mentioned above, as shown in FIG. 43, electronic elements such as resistors R1L, R2L ..., Capacitors C1L, C2L ... Are connected to required locations.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1L and TP2L are provided and used for connection with a required portion.

[5.13 Relay board 760]

The configuration of the relay board 760 is shown in FIG. The connectors CN1M, CN2M, and CN3M are mounted on the relay board 760.

The connector CN1M is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H23 connecting the connector CN4L of the decorative substrate 740 of FIG. 43.
Therefore, this connector CN1M has a 14-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 14th pin as the numbers “1” to “14” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN4L described above.

The connector CN2M is connected to an LED substrate (not shown).
Pins 4 and 6 are ground terminals.
The fifth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V).
The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA.

The connector CN3M is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H24 that connects to the LED substrate 780 on the downstream side.
This connector CN1B has a 6-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 6th pin as shown by the numbers "1" to "6".
Pins 4 and 6 are ground terminals.
The fifth pin is a terminal for a 5V DC voltage (DC5V).
The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connectors CN1M, CN2M, and CN3M are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

The relay board 760 is equipped with a buffer circuit 761 which is a Schmitt trigger buffer containing a CMOS 8 circuit, similar to the buffer circuit 402 of FIG. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 12th pin, the 13th pin, and the 14th pin of the connector CN1M.

The clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C supplied from the upstream decorative board 740 to the connector CN1M are input to the A1 terminal and the A2 terminal of the buffer circuit 761 and are signal-compensated. Then, it is output from the Y1 terminal and the Y2 terminal, and is transmitted to the downstream side as a clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA by the connector CN2M.
The clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are also input to the A5 and A6 terminals of the buffer circuit 761 to compensate for the signals. Then, it is output from the Y5 terminal and the Y6 terminal, and is transmitted to the downstream LED board 780 as a clock signal CLK and a data signal DATA by the connector CN3M.

Therefore, the decorative substrate 740 buffers the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C, and then transmits the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C to the two downstream LED substrates (LED substrate 780 and LED substrate (not shown)).

[5.14 LED board 780]

The configuration of the LED substrate 780 is shown in FIG. The connectors CN1N and CN2N are mounted on the LED board 780.

The connector CN1N is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H24 connecting to the connector CN3M of the relay board 760 of FIG. 44.
Therefore, this connector CN1N has a 6-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 6th pin as the numbers “1” to “6” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN3M described above.

The connector CN2N is connected to an LED substrate (not shown).
The first pin is a terminal for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The fourth pin is a ground terminal.
The second pin is a terminal for the clock signal CLK, and the third pin is a terminal for the data signal DATA.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connectors CN1N and CN2N are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

A buffer circuit 781, which is a triple buffer gate, is mounted on the LED board 780. As the power supply voltage for this, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used. The 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied from the 5th pin of the connector CN1N.

Further, the LED driver 782 is mounted, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply voltage for the LED driver 782. The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the first pin of the connector CN1N.

The flow of various signals on the LED substrate 780 will be described.
The clock signal CLK and data signal DATA supplied from the upstream relay board 760 to the connector CN1N are input to the buffer circuit 781 and buffered. Then, it is sent to the connector CN2N and sent to the downstream LED board 790.

The clock signal CLK and the data signal DATA are also supplied to the LED driver 782.
The LED driver 782 uses the output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, and LEDR8 of the light emission drive current to drive 22 systems of LED light emission.
These output terminals LEDR1, LEDG1, LEDB1 ... LEDR7, LEDG7, LEDB7, LEDR8 are connected to each of the 22 LED circuits formed as the light emitting unit 783, and the light emitting drive current (03-R1, 03-G1, 03-G1, 03-B1 ・ ・ ・ 03-G7, 03-B7, 03-R8) is played.
As shown in the figure, the LED circuit of each system of the light emitting unit 783 is composed of two or three LEDs (LED1, LED2, ...) Connected in series and a resistance element. The LED circuits of each system are arranged in parallel, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is applied to each anode side.

As described above, the LED substrate 780 has the following configuration.
-The clock signal CLK and the data signal DATA transmitted from the upstream are transferred to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 781.
The clock signal CLK and the data signal DATA are also used in the LED driver 782 to drive the light emitting unit 783.

-The connector CN1N receives a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) and uses it as an operating power supply.
-A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied to the downstream side as an operating power supply voltage.

In the LED substrate 780, in addition to those mentioned above, as shown in FIG. 45, electronic elements such as resistors R1N, R2N ..., Capacitors C1N, C2N ... Are connected to required locations.
Further, as shown in the figure, taps TP1N and TP2N are provided and used for connection with a required place.

By the way, the LED board 790 on the downstream side of the LED board 780 is not shown, but roughly speaking, the LED board 780 is configured by removing the buffer circuit 781 and the connector CN2N. That is, the LED board 790 has an LED driver and a light emitting unit, and is configured to drive the LED light emission based on the input clock signal CLK and data signal DATA.
The LED board 790 is equipped with an LED driver and an LED, but is not equipped with a buffer circuit. Therefore, only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the connector CN2N to the LED substrate 790, and 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. That is, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is supplied to the LED board 780 provided with the buffer circuit based on the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the effect control board 30 (see the 6th pin of the connector CN1J in FIG. 36). It has a structure of

[5.15 Relay board under the back of the board 800]

The configuration of the underboard relay board 800 is shown in FIG. The connectors CN1Q, CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q are mounted on the underboard relay board 800.

The connector CN1Q is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H30 connected to the connector CN11J of the LED connection board 700 of FIG. 40.
Therefore, this connector CN1Q has a 16-terminal configuration from the first pin to the 16th pin as the numbers “1” to “16” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN11J described above.

The connector CN2Q is connected to the movable object motor 830 (see FIG. 58).
Pins 3 and 4 are terminals to which a 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is applied.
The first pin is the motor drive signal MOT4- / 2, the second pin is the motor drive signal MOT4- / 1, the fifth pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-2, and the sixth pin is the motor drive signal MOT4-1. NS.

The connector CN3Q is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H31 that connects to the decorative substrate 820 on the downstream side.
This connector CN3Q has a 10-terminal configuration from pins 1 to 10 as shown by numbers "1" to "10".
Pins 1 to 6 are terminals for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The 7th pin, the 8th pin, the 9th pin, and the 10th pin are terminals of the light emitting drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8.
A flexible cable (for example, a flexible flat cable) is connected to this connector CN3Q as a transmission line H31, and the rated current is small, so that the number of power supply terminals is larger than that of other connectors. For example, the number of terminals (6) for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the connector CN3Q is larger than the number of terminals (2) for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the connector CN1Q.

The connector CN4Q is connected to the position detection switch 831 (see FIG. 58).
The first pin is a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the third pin is a ground terminal. The second pin serves as an input terminal for the sense signal SENSv7 from the connected position detection switch.

The conductor points P1 and P2 in the housing of the connectors CN1Q, CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q are connected to the ground for mounting strength.

In the under-board relay board 800, the signals and voltages supplied by the connector CN1Q are distributed downstream by the connectors CN2Q, CN3Q, and CN4Q.
In the connector CN1Q, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is input at the 2 terminals of the 4th and 6th pins, but in the connector CN3Q, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is input downstream at the 6 terminals of the 1st to 6th pins. I'm sending. As a result, the number of terminals to the downstream (total number of terminals of the connectors CN2Q, CN3Q, CN4Q) is larger than the number of terminals to the upstream (the number of terminals of the connector CN1Q).

[5.16 Decorative board 820]
The decorative substrate 820 will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
The connector CN1S is mounted on the decorative substrate 820.
The connector CN1S is connected to the transmission line end of the transmission line H31 connecting between the connector CN3Q and the connector CN3Q of the underboard relay board 800 shown in FIG.
Therefore, this connector CN1S has a 10-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 10th pin as the numbers “1” to “10” are attached, and the terminal assignment is the same as that of the connector CN3Q described above.

The decorative substrate 820 is provided with a light emitting unit 821 provided with four LED circuits, and is driven by light emitting currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8, respectively, via the connector CN1S. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied via the connector CN1S is applied to the anode side of the LED of the light emitting unit 821.
The decorative substrate 820 is arranged in a movable body (not shown), and is a substrate that emits LED light from the movable body portion.

<6. Explanation of attention configuration>

Hereinafter, notable configurations will be sequentially described among the configurations of the gaming machine 1 described so far.

[6.1 Serial data signal between inner frame 2 and door 6]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A1-1).
(Structure A1-1)
The gaming machine 1 is attached to an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 2, a plurality of detection means attached to the door 6, and the door 6. The first board is configured to convert each detection signal of the plurality of detection means into a serial data signal and transmit it to another board.

In the case of this idea of (Structure A1-1), as an example corresponding to the first substrate, the front frame LED connection substrate 500, the side unit upper right LED substrate 600, or the LED connection substrate 700 can be mentioned.
The detection signals are sense signals SENS0 to SENS14, sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9, and the like. Therefore, a plurality of detection means are devices that generate these sense signals. Specifically, it is a switch such as a position detection switch, an effect operation means such as an effect button 13, a cross key 15a, a decision button 15b, a sensor such as a touch sensor, and the like.

The first board converts a plurality of detection signals by various detection means such as switches, buttons, and sensors into serial data signals and outputs them, so that the number of wires for the sense signal can be reduced.
Further, this makes it possible to prevent the number of wires from becoming enormous even if a large number of sensors, switches and the like are provided on the door 6. In other words, the wiring configuration can be not complicated while abundantly arranging the effect means and the detection means on the door 6 closest to the player.

Here is a concrete example. The front frame LED connection board 500 shown in FIGS. 15 to 22 is serialized by the P / S conversion circuits 505 and 506, mainly as described in FIGS. 18 and 22. Then, the resulting serial data signal S_IN_DATA is transmitted to the inner frame LED relay board 400 by the transmission line H8.
As a result, the number of wires on the transmission line H8 can be reduced. In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 combines the serial data signal from the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit and the sense signals SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14, and further collects the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 into serial data. The effect of reducing the number of wires is great.

Further, the side unit upper right LED board 600 shown in FIGS. 24 to 29 converts the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X into serial data by the P / S conversion circuits 602 and 603 of FIG. Then, the resulting serial data signal S_IN_DATAx is sent to the relay board 550 by the transmission line H10, and further transmitted to the front frame LED connection board 500 via the transmission line H9.
As a result, the number of wires of the transmission lines H9 and H10 can be reduced.

Further, in the LED connection board 700 shown in FIGS. 36 to 41, the sense signals SENSv0 to SENSv9 are serialized by the P / S conversion circuits 701 and 702 in FIG. Then, the resulting serial data signal P_S_IN_DATA is transmitted to the effect control board 30 by the transmission line H20.
As a result, the number of wires on the transmission line H20 can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A1-2) in addition to (configuration A1-1).
(Structure A1-2)
The other board that transmits the serial data signal is a board that is attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member).

In the case of this idea of (Structure A1-2), an example corresponding to the first substrate is the front frame LED connection substrate 500, and the other substrate corresponds to the inner frame LED relay substrate 400.
The front frame LED connection board 500 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 are electrically connected by a transmission line H8 with the door 6 open as shown in FIG.
In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 converts the wiring into serial data as described above, so that a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wires in the harness (transmission line H8) for connecting the wiring of the opening / closing portion of the door 6. It will be possible to transmit. As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive wiring in the moving portion. Further, by reducing the number of wirings, it becomes easy to improve the flexibility of the harness and the durability and reliability, and it is easy to realize suitable wirings in moving parts.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-1).
(Structure A2-1)
The gaming machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 2, a plurality of first detection means attached to the door 6, and a door. A first board attached to the door 6 and a second board attached to the door 6 below the first board are provided, and the first board sequentially records detection signals of the plurality of detection means. It is configured to be converted into a signal and transmitted to the second substrate.
The plurality of first detection means and the first substrate are attached to, for example, the upper region of the door 6.

In the case of this idea of (Structure A2-1), the following can be considered as an example corresponding to the first substrate and the second substrate.
・ First board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
The term "transmitting to the second substrate" includes both transmitting directly to the second substrate and transmitting to the second substrate via another substrate.

Further, as an example corresponding to the first detection means, a detection means such as a sensor that generates sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C can be mentioned. These detecting means are arranged in the upper region of the door 6. The upper region of the door 6 refers to a range in the vertical direction of the door 6 above, for example, the bottom line UL of the game board 3 shown in FIG.

The sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are detection signals obtained by the photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F arranged on the lower right LED substrate 620 of the side unit in FIG. 30. The sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are input from the connector CN3E to the connector CN3E of the LED board 600 on the upper right side unit of FIG. 26.
FIG. 10 shows the photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F, which are used as sensors for determining the operating state of the movable object moved by the lower right movable object motor 103 of the side unit.

The sense signal SENS1X is a detection signal generated by the movable object position detection switch 102 at the lower right of the side unit shown in FIG. This sense signal SENS1X is input from the connector CN3E via the connectors CN4F and CN3F of FIG. 30 to the connector CN3E of the LED board 600 on the upper right side unit of FIG. 26.

The sense signal SENS2X is input to the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit from the connector CN7E of FIG. The connector CN7E is connected to the sensor of the side unit device 101 shown in FIG.

The detection means (photocoupler PC1F, PC2F, PC3F, position detection switch 102, side unit device 101 sensor) that generate these sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C are all above the door (from the bottom line UL). It is located above).

Therefore, as an example corresponding to the first board, the side unit upper right LED board 600 aggregates the sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C of the detection means arranged in the upper region of the door 6 into serial data, and relays the board. It is configured to transmit to the front frame LED connection board 500 corresponding to the second board via 550.

By converting a plurality of sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C that are close to each other in this way into serial data, a plurality of detections by various detection means such as sensors, switches, and buttons existing on the upper part of the door 6 are performed. The signal can be efficiently converted into a serial data signal, the wiring efficiency for the detection signal from each place can be improved, the number of wirings can be reduced, and the wiring length can be shortened.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the configuration having the relay board 550, the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit transmits the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx toward the front frame LED connection board 500 via the relay board 550. Of course, it may be configured to directly transmit from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit to the front frame LED connection board 500.

Further, the term "upper part of the door 6" does not mean above the bottom line UL, but means, for example, above the central line in the vertical direction of the door 6, and in that case, the plurality of detecting means above the door 6 It is also possible to consider a configuration in which the detection signals are collectively converted into serial data on the upper substrate.
Further, the "left portion of the door 6" means a portion to the left of the central line in the left-right direction of the door 6, and the detection signals of the plurality of detection means on the left portion of the door 6 in that case are transmitted to the substrate on the left portion. It is also possible to consider a configuration in which the serial data is collectively converted in.
Further, the "right portion of the door 6" means a portion to the right of the central line in the left-right direction of the door 6, and the detection signals of the plurality of detection means on the right portion of the door 6 in that case are transmitted to the substrate on the right portion. It is also possible to consider a configuration in which the serial data is collectively converted in.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-2) in addition to (configuration A2-1).
(Structure A2-2)
The gaming machine 1 includes a third substrate attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member) and one or a plurality of second detecting means attached below the first detecting means in the door 6 (door member). The second board has a configuration in which the detection signal of the second detection means and the serial data signal from the first board are collectively converted into a serial data signal and transmitted to the third board. Has been done.

in this case,
・ First board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
-Third board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
Can be thought of.
That is, as an example corresponding to the first board, in addition to the side unit upper right LED board 600 performing serial data conversion, the front frame LED connection board 500 corresponding to the second board also further performs serial data conversion to relay the inner frame LED. It is configured to transmit to the board 400.

As an example corresponding to the second detection means, a detection means such as a switch that generates sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 can be mentioned.
These detection means are arranged below the detection means that generate the above-mentioned sense signals SENS1X, SENS2X, SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C.

The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are detection signals generated by detection means such as an operation detection switch such as the cross key 15a and the enter button 15b. The sense signals SENS0 to SENS7 are input to the front frame LED connection board 500 from the connector CN7C of FIG.

The sense signals SENS8, SENS9, and SENS11 are input from the button LED connection board 640 to the front frame LED connection board 500.
The sense signal SENS8 is, for example, a detection signal generated by a push button sensor in the effect button 13.
The sense signal SENS9 is, for example, a detection signal generated by the rotation origin sensor in the effect button 13.
The sense signal SENS 11 is, for example, a detection signal generated by the rotation effect light sensor in the effect button 13.

The sense signal SENS14 is a detection signal generated by a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 and input to the front frame LED connection board 500 by the connector CN9C.

The front frame LED connection board 500 uses the P / S conversion circuits 505 and 506 of FIG. 18 to connect these sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 to the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the side unit upper right LED board 600. And make it serial data. Then, it is output as a serial data signal S_IN_DATA from the front frame LED connection board 500 toward the effect control board 30.
Therefore, a plurality of detection signals by various detection means such as sensors, switches, and buttons existing in the upper region of the door are collected by the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit, and the detection signals of the detection means below them are collected on the upper right side of the side unit. The front frame LED connection board 500 arranged below the LED board 600 is grouped together.

By gradually converting the detection means into serial data on each board according to the position of the detection means in this way, the detection signals of the detection means existing at the upper and lower parts of the door can be efficiently converted into serial data signals. This makes it possible to improve the wiring efficiency for detection signals from various places and reduce the number of wirings. Also, the wiring length can be shortened.
Further, as a result, a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wirings in the harness (transmission line H8) for connecting the wirings of the opening / closing portion of the door.
As a result, even when a large number of detection means are mounted on the door 6, the reliability of wiring in the moving portion can be improved.

In this example, as an example corresponding to the second detection means, a plurality of detection means such as a switch for generating sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 are mentioned, but the second detection means. Is useful even if it is single (Structure A2-2).
For example, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a configuration in which one sense signal is collectively converted into serial data together with the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit, and the serial data signal S_IN_DATA is output to the effect control board 30. Is also possible.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A2-3) in addition to (configuration A2-1) or (configuration A2-2).
(Structure A2-3)
The second substrate includes a first buffer circuit that buffers a serial data signal from the first substrate, a serial data signal output from the first buffer circuit, and a detection signal of the second detection means. A conversion means for collectively converting the above into a serial data signal, a second buffer circuit for buffering the serial data signal obtained by the conversion means, and a serial data signal output from the second buffer circuit. An output means for transmitting data to the third substrate is provided.

Examples corresponding to the first buffer circuit, the second buffer circuit, the output means, and the conversion means can be considered as follows.
First buffer circuit: Buffer circuit 502 shown in FIGS. 17 and 22
Second buffer circuit: Buffer circuit 513 shown in FIGS. 18 and 22.
Output means: Connector CN2C shown in FIG.
Conversion means: FIG. 18 shows a circuit portion including a P / S conversion circuit 505 and a P / S conversion circuit 506.

In this case, the signal can be compensated for the attenuation of the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx transmitted by the buffer circuit 502, and the stability of the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the downstream can be improved. In that state, the P / S conversion circuits 505 and 506 can collectively convert the data into serial data. Further, by performing buffer processing in the buffer circuit 513, signal compensation for transmission of the serial data signal S_IN_DATA can be performed.
As described above, it is possible to perform serial data conversion while securing stable data, and to maintain the signal quality of the serial data sent to the effect control board 30.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A3-1).
(Structure A3-1)
The gaming machine 1 is attached to an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 2, a decorative unit attached to the door 6, and the decorative unit. A plurality of first detecting means, a first substrate attached to the decorative unit, and a second substrate attached to a portion of the door 6 outside the decorative unit are provided, and the first substrate is the said. The detection signals of the plurality of first detection means are converted into serial data signals and transmitted to the second substrate.
The decorative unit is replaceably attached to, for example, the door 6.

In the case of this idea of (Structure A3-1), the side unit 10 can be mentioned as an example corresponding to the decorative unit.
An example corresponding to the first substrate is the side unit upper right LED substrate 600, and an example corresponding to the second substrate is the front frame LED connection substrate 500.
The front frame LED connection board 500 is provided on the door 6, but not inside the side unit 10.
The side unit upper right LED board 600, which is the first board, transmits the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx toward the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the second board (via the relay board 550). Of course, the relay board 550 may not be present and may be directly transmitted.

The first detection means is a plurality of detection signals attached to the side unit 10, and corresponds to the detection means that generates the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X.
The detection means for generating the sense signals SENS_A, SENS_B, and SENS_C are the photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, and PC3F shown in FIGS. 10 and 30.
The detection means for generating the sense signal SENS1X is a movable object position detection switch 102 (see FIG. 10) at the lower right of the side unit, which is connected to the connector CN4F of FIG.
The detection means for generating the sense signal SENS2X is the side unit device 101 (see FIG. 10) connected to the connector CN7E of FIG. 25. These photocouplers PC1F, PC2F, PC3F, and the side unit lower right movable object position detection switch 102. , The side unit device 101 is provided in the side unit 10.

When the side unit 10 is replaceable with respect to the door 6, sensors, switches, buttons, etc. are also provided in the side unit 10 as a substrate and detection means, and a signal is transmitted to and from the substrate on the door 6 side. Will be.
In this case, the side unit upper right LED board 600 (first board) arranged in the side unit 10 has a plurality of sense signals SENS_A by various first detection means such as switches, buttons, and sensors of the side unit 10. SENS_B, SENS_C, SENS1X, and SENS2X are converted into serial data signals S_IN_DATAx and output to the front frame LED connection board 500 of the door 6 via the relay board 550. As a result, the number of wires in the harness as the transmission lines H10 and H9 can be effectively reduced. In particular, since the transmission line H9 is a harness at a portion that is separated when the side unit 10 is replaced, it is desirable in terms of configuration that the number of wires can be reduced and the wiring can be simplified.
Further, this makes it possible to prevent the number of wirings from becoming enormous even if a large number of sensors, switches and the like are provided on the side unit 10. Even if the side unit 10 is configured to perform an effect operation and various detection operations according to the effect operation, the number of wirings can be prevented from becoming excessive.

The decorative unit provided on the door 6 is not limited to the side unit 10, and a unit such as an effect button 13 is also included in the decorative unit. That is, anything provided on the door 6 that can be replaced with respect to the door 6 and that performs decoration and directing operations is the decoration unit referred to here.
For example, the effect button 13 is configured as a decorative unit attached to the door 6. The detection signals of the plurality of detection means in the effect button unit are converted into serial data by, for example, the button LED board 660 inside, and directed to the board outside the effect button unit (for example, the button LED connection board 640 and the front frame LED connection board 500). It is also possible to consider a configuration in which the data is transmitted.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration A3-2) in addition to (configuration A3-1).
(Structure A3-2)
The door 6 (door member) includes one or a plurality of second detection means attached to a portion outside the decorative unit, and the second substrate includes a detection signal of the second detection means and the first substrate. The serial data signals from the above are collectively converted into serial data signals and transmitted to the third substrate attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member).

In the case of this (configuration A3-2), an inner frame LED relay board 400 can be mentioned as an example corresponding to the third board.
As the second detection means, detection means such as a switch that generates sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, and SENS14 can be mentioned. That is, the cross key 15a decision button 15b, the operation detection switch such as the effect button 13, the rotation origin sensor in the effect button 13, the rotation effect light sensor in the effect button 13, the touch sensor provided on the firing operation handle 15, and the like are second. It becomes a detection means of.

Then, in the front frame LED connection board 500, the sense signals SENS0 to SENS7, SENS8, SENS9, SENS11, SENS14 by these second detection means and the serial data signal S_IN_DATAx from the side unit upper right LED board 600 are collectively serial data signals. It is configured to be converted to S_IN_DATA and transmitted to the inner frame LED relay board 400 attached to the inner frame 2.
By continuously converting the detection signal in the door 6 into serial data by the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit and the LED connection board 500 in the front frame, the number of wires for transmitting from the door 6 to the inner frame 2 side can be suppressed. ..
In particular, in a harness (transmission line H8: see FIG. 5) that connects the wiring of the opening / closing portion of the door 6, a large amount of detection signals can be transmitted with a small number of wirings. As a result, the reliability of wiring in the moving part can be improved.

[6.2 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (1)]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B1).
(Structure B1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third board for receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage is provided, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. It is more than the number of lines in.

In the case of this (configuration B1), an example (specific example 1) corresponding as follows with reference to FIG. 11 is assumed.
(Specific example 1)
-First board: Power supply board 300
-Second board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
-Third board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・ First transmission line: Transmission line H3
-Second transmission line: Transmission line H8
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

According to this example, the transmission of the power supply voltage between the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500 is shown in FIG.

A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400 by the transmission line H3. In the transmission line H3, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted using three lines as shown (see connector CN3A in FIG. 12 and connector CN4B in FIG. 14).
The transmission line H3 is composed of six lines, but the remaining three lines are used as ground.

As shown in FIG. 48, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the front frame LED connection board 500 by the transmission line H8. In the transmission line H8, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted using four lines as shown (see connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and connector CN2C in FIG. 15).

Further, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, as described above, the 5V generator 410 (see FIG. 14) generates a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) using a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and the transmission line H8 connects the front frame LED. It is supplied to the substrate 500. In the transmission line H8, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is transmitted using two lines as shown (see connector CN2B in FIG. 13 and connector CN2C in FIG. 15).
Further, in the transmission line H8, five lines are used for the ground.

The front frame LED connection board 500 supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) further downstream.
The connector CN1C transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) downstream on each line, and two lines are used as ground. (See FIG. 16).
The transmission line H9 from the connector CN3C transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the relay board 550 (further, the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit) on three lines, and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) on one line. Is transmitted (see FIG. 17). Five tracks are used for the ground.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted downstream by one line by the connector CN4C (see FIG. 16).

The connector CN10C transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) to the button LED connection board 640 by the transmission line H15, respectively (see FIG. 20). Five tracks are used for the ground.
Further, in the front frame LED connection board 500, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the power supply separation / protection circuit 520 (see FIG. 15) as described above, and the button LED is connected by the transmission line H15. It is supplied to the substrate 640.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated by the power supply separation / protection circuit 521 (see FIG. 19) to be used as the power supply voltage of the motor drivers 510 and 511 inside the board.

Focusing on the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), three lines are used in the transmission line H3 for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) between the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500. However, the transmission line H8 uses four lines. That is, it has a configuration corresponding to the above-mentioned (configuration B1).

The transmission line H8 on the downstream side uses more 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H3 on the upstream side, which is advantageous when the connector on the downstream side is to be miniaturized. Become.

Specifically, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, the connectors CN1B and CN4B are used for the connection with the upstream side, and the connectors CN2B and CN3B are used for the connection with the downstream side. Examples of connectors CN1B, CN2B, and CN4B are shown in FIGS. 49, 50, and 51, except for the connector CN3B for speaker connection only.
Although each figure shows an example of a top type in which the transmission line end is inserted from above while mounted on the substrate, a side type in which the transmission line end is inserted from the lateral direction may be used.

The connector CN1B of FIG. 49 has the following specifications, for example.
・ Number of pins: 28
・ Plane horizontal size S1: 30.0 mm
・ Plane vertical size S2: 8.3 mm
・ Height size S3: 9.6 mm
・ Rated current: 3A
・ Rated voltage: 250V
・ Terminal pitch: 2 mm
・ Contact diameter: 0.7 mm

The connector CN2B of FIG. 50 has the following specifications, for example.
・ Number of pins: 30
・ Plane horizontal size S1: 26.2 mm
・ Plane vertical size S2: 7.4 mm
・ Height size S3: 5.55 mm
・ Rated current: 2A
-Rated voltage: 100V
・ Terminal pitch: 1.5 mm
・ Contact diameter: 0.65 mm

The connector CN4B of FIG. 51 has the following specifications, for example.
・ Number of pins: 6
・ Plane horizontal size S1: 17.5 mm
・ Plane vertical size S2: 6.4 mm
・ Height size S3: 8.8 mm
・ Rated current: 3A
・ Rated voltage: 250V
・ Terminal pitch: 2.5 mm
・ Contact diameter: 0.9 mm

From the above, it can be seen that the connector CN2B on the downstream side is miniaturized.
The contact diameter shall be the pin terminal diameter in the case of a male connector and the corresponding pin terminal diameter in the case of a female connector.

For various signals transmitted by the upstream side, the transmission line H7 and the connector CN1B, and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied by the transmission line H3 and the connector CN4B, the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 are used for communication with the downstream side. In this case, it is usually considered that the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 are required to have the same rated current and rated voltage. It is assumed that the connector size is almost the same.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, 4 pins and 4 lines are applied to the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) particularly in the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8. This reduces the current load on one pin and makes it possible to use the connector CN2B, which is small and has a small rated current as described above. By adopting a small connector, the inner frame LED relay board 400 is effective in expanding the layout margin on the board, improving the degree of freedom in design, or reducing the size of the board.

Further, as a result, as the connector CN2C of the front frame LED connection board 500, which is also small and has a small rated current can be used, the same effect can be obtained.

By the way, as a specific example corresponding to the above (configuration B1), the following (specific example 2) can also be considered.
(Specific example 2)
・ First board: LED connection board 700
-Second board: Relay board 800 under the back of the board
-Third board: Decorative board 820
-First transmission line: Transmission line H30
-Second transmission line: Transmission line H31
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

As shown in FIG. 46, the connector CN1Q (and transmission line H30) of the underboard relay board 800 uses two lines for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), while the connector CN3Q (and transmission line H31). Uses 5 lines for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
The transmission line H31 on the downstream side uses more 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) than the transmission line H30 on the upstream side, which is advantageous when the connector on the downstream side is to be miniaturized. Become.

Specifically, FIGS. 52 and 53 show examples of the connectors CN1Q and CN3Q of the board back bottom relay board 800.
Although each figure shows an example of a side type in which the transmission line end is inserted from the lateral direction while mounted on the substrate, a top type in which the transmission line end is inserted from above may be used.

The connector CN1Q of FIG. 52 has the following specifications, for example.
・ Number of pins: 16
・ Plane horizontal size S1: 10.2 mm
・ Plane vertical size S2: 5.1 mm
・ Height size S3: 6.1 mm
・ Rated current: 1.0A
・ Rated voltage: 50V
・ Terminal pitch: 1 mm

The connector CN3Q of FIG. 53 has the following specifications, for example.
・ Number of pins: 10
・ Plane horizontal size S1: 10.9 mm
・ Plane vertical size S2: 4.5 mm
・ Height size S3: 2.0 mm
・ Rated current: 0.5A
・ Rated voltage: 50V
・ Terminal pitch: 0.5 mm

From the above, it can be seen that the connector CN3Q on the downstream side is miniaturized.
That is, the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31 use 4 pins and 4 lines for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to reduce the current load on one pin, and as described above, the connector CN3Q is small and has a small rated current. It is possible to adopt. By adopting a small connector, it is effective to expand the layout margin on the board, improve the degree of freedom of design, or reduce the size of the board in the underboard relay board 800.

Further, as a result, as the connector CN1S of the decorative substrate 820, which is also small and has a small rated current can be used, the same effect can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B2-1).
(Structure B2-1)
The game machine 1 is attached to the inner frame 2 (frame member), the door 6 (door member) that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 2, the first substrate attached to the inner frame 2, and the inner frame 2. The first board is connected to the first board by the first transmission line to receive the supply of the first power supply voltage, and the first board is attached to the door 6 and connected to the second board by the second transmission line. A third board for receiving a power supply voltage is provided, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is a line for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. It is more than a number.

In this case, the examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as those in (Specific Example 1) of the above (Structure B1). ..

In this case, since the front frame LED connection board 500 which is the third board is arranged in the door 6 and the inner frame LED relay board 400 which is the second board is arranged in the inner frame 2, the transmission line which is the second transmission line As shown in FIG. 5, the H8 is a harness for connecting the opening / closing portion of the door 6.
As the connector CN2B and the connector CN2C connecting both ends of the transmission line H8, those having the specifications of FIG. 50 are used. As mentioned above, it is a relatively small connector.

It is extremely effective to be able to miniaturize the connectors CN2B and CN2C that are both ends of the opening / closing portion of the door 6 in order to form a space that does not interfere with the operation at the time of opening / closing.
It is desirable that the connectors CN2B and CN2C be exposed in the open / closed space so that an excessive force is not applied to the transmission line H8. Then, if the size of the connectors CN2B and CN2C is large, not only the arrangement of the board on which the connectors CN2B and CN2C are placed but also the arrangement of peripheral parts is easily restricted, and unnecessary protrusions are formed when opening and closing the door 6. It is easy to form. Since the connector connection part is an electrically fragile part, we want to avoid a structure that protrudes and is susceptible to external pressure. Then, the degree of freedom in design is further limited.

In the present embodiment, the number of lines used for transmission of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is larger than that of the transmission line H3, so that the connectors CN2B and CN2C can be miniaturized for the reason described in the above (configuration B1). As a result, it becomes suitable as a connector used for the opening / closing part of the door 6, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design and reduce the electrical fragility by reducing the protrusion.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B2-2) in addition to (configuration B2-1).
(Structure B2-2)
The outer size of the connector used for the second transmission line is smaller than that of the connector used for the first transmission line.

That is, as described above for the sizes S1, S2, and S3, the housing size of the connector CN2B is smaller than the housing size of the connector CN1B.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side adopts a small connector having a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B3).
(Structure B3)
The game machine 1 has a smaller substrate area than the first substrate, the second substrate connected to the first substrate by the first transmission line and supplied with the first power supply voltage, the first substrate, and the second substrate. It is small and includes a third board that is connected to the second board by a second transmission line and receives the supply of the first power supply voltage, and is used for transmission of the first power supply voltage on the second transmission line. The number of lines is larger than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

Examples corresponding to the first substrate, the second substrate, the third substrate, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as those in (Specific Example 1) of the above (Structure B1).

In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the third board, is smaller in size than the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, and the power supply board 300, which is the first board.
FIG. 8 shows the front frame LED connection board 500, and FIG. 9 shows the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the power supply board 300. Since FIGS. 8 and 9 are shown at the same scale, as can be seen by comparison, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a board area (mounting surface on the board surface) more than the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the power supply board 300. Area) is small.
That is, the front frame LED connection board 500 has a relatively small margin for arranging electronic components.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the connector CN2B and the transmission line H8 of the inner frame LED relay board 400, the number of lines of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is increased as compared with the transmission line H3 on the upstream side thereof, and the connector CN2B is miniaturized. As a result, the connector CN2C can be miniaturized. This makes it possible to reduce the connector mount area of the front frame LED connection board 500 and reduce the burden on the board layout. Conversely, the front frame LED connection board 500 can be realized with a small board.

In particular, the front frame LED connection board 500 is arranged on the door 6, and it is desirable that the board and the mounting parts are as light as possible in order to reduce the weight of the door 6. It is also advantageous in that respect.
Further, the lower part of the door 6 tends to be densely packed with sensors, motors, effect button units, etc., and it is desirable that the boards and parts to be arranged are as small as possible. This configuration is also advantageous in that respect.
Of course, the fact that the connector CN2C can adopt a small connector makes it possible to keep the height size S3 of the board in which the components are mounted low.

Although the third substrate is smaller than the first and second substrates in terms of substrate area, it may be smaller in volume than the first and second substrates including the substrate thickness.
Further, the space volume required for arrangement, including the height in which the electronic components are mounted, may be smaller for the third substrate than for the first and second substrates.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B4).
(Structure B4)
The game machine 1 is arranged inside a movable body, a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receiving a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second transmission line. A third board that is connected to the second board and receives the supply of the first power supply voltage is provided, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is the number of lines in the first transmission line. It is more than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage.

In this case, the examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as those in (Specific Example 2) of the above (Structure B1). be able to.

The decorative substrate 820, which is the third substrate, is attached to a movable body (not shown) arranged in the lower front direction, and as shown in FIG. 47, a large number of LEDs are mounted and the movable body emits LED light. ..
Therefore, the transmission line H31 is a member that electrically connects the movable parts.

As the connector CN3Q of the board back lower relay board 800, which is the second board, a small one is used as shown in FIG. 53 above. Therefore, the connector of FIG. 53 is formed so that the connector CN1S of the decorative substrate 820 also follows.

That is, in the present embodiment, the number of lines used for transmission of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is larger than that of the transmission line H3, so that the connector CN3Q, for the reason explained in (Specific Example 2) of the above (configuration B1), CN1S can be miniaturized.
This makes the connector CN1S suitable for mounting on a substrate in a movable body. This is because it is desirable that the decorative substrate 820 mounted on the movable body is small, and therefore the components to be mounted, particularly the connector having a large occupied area, are preferably small.
Therefore, according to (Structure B4), the decorative substrate 820 mounted on the movable body can be made into an appropriate substrate size.
In addition, since the connector CN1S can be miniaturized, the degree of freedom in mounting the LED is increased, and it is also suitable for designing the light emitting position for the production.

Further, although the connector SN1S is a tall component on the substrate, a relatively low connector SN1S can be adopted. In the case of a movable object, it is desirable to use a substrate with as little height as possible. It depends on the request to prevent it from becoming an obstacle when moving, or to place it inside a movable object as much as possible. Therefore, it is effective to use a connector having a low height size S3. In this sense, the side type connector as shown in FIG. 53 is more desirable than the top type connector.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B5).
(Structure B5)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third substrate for receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage is provided, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. The number of lines is larger than the number of lines in the above, and the second transmission line is formed by a flexible cable.

In this case, the examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage are the same as those in (Specific Example 2) of the above (Structure B1). be able to.

The flexible cable refers to an FFC (flexible flat cable) or an FPC (flexible printed circuit board).
In particular, in this case, a flexible cable is used for the transmission line H31 connecting the second board, the underboard relay board 800, and the third board, the decorative board 820.
As can be seen from the assignment of the connector CN1S in FIG. 47, the flexible cable of the transmission line H31 transmits only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the light emission drive currents 13-B7, 13-R8, 13-G8, and 13-B8. There is.
A flexible cable is also used for the transmission line H23 that connects the decorative substrate 740 and the relay substrate 760 attached to the movable body accessory. As can be seen from the pin assignment of the connector CN4L in FIG. 43, the transmission line H23 transmits a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a clock signal CLK_C, and a data signal DATA_C.

As described above, the transmission line H used in various places is not limited to the flexible cable, and may be, for example, a combination of a plurality of conductive wires. In particular, here, it is assumed that the transmission line H31 is a flexible cable. ..
Of course, since the decorative substrate 820 is arranged on the movable member and the transmission line H31 moves within a predetermined stroke range, it is preferable to use a flexible cable.

However, in the case of a flexible cable, the current that can be passed through one line is small.
Therefore, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) received from the transmission line H30 by the connector CN1Q by the two lines on the underboard relay board 800 is applied to the decorative board 820 by using the five lines on the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31. We are supplying. As a result, sufficient power is supplied even if a flexible cable is used, and appropriate LED light emission is realized on the decorative substrate 820.
Further, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) received from the transmission line H22 by the two lines of the decorative board 740 by the connector CN1L is supplied to the relay board 760 by the three lines of the connector CN4L and the transmission line H23. There is. Similarly, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) received by one line by the connector CN1L is supplied to the relay board 760 by using three lines in the connector CN4L and the transmission line H23. As a result, sufficient power is supplied to the relay board 760 and later even if a flexible cable is used.
As can be seen from FIGS. 43 and 44, in the transmission line H23, the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are transmitted by one line. That is, when a flexible cable is used, the number of lines is increased for power supply as compared with a normal harness, but the clock and control data signals are supplied by one line.

This (configuration B5) is also effective when a flexible cable is used for the transmission line H8. That is, it can also be applied as (Specific Example 1) of the above (Structure B1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B6-1).
(Structure B6-1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third board for receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage is provided, and the number of lines used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line. The second substrate uses the first power supply voltage to generate a second power supply voltage, and the third substrate uses the second transmission line to generate the second power supply voltage. It is also configured to receive the supply of.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, and the first power supply voltage can be the same as (Specific Example 1) of the above (Structure B1). ..
An example of the second power supply voltage can be a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).

In this case, the inner frame LED relay board 400, which is the second board, includes a 5V generator 410 (see FIG. 14) and generates a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
This 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is supplied from the connector CN2B of FIG. 13 to the front frame LED connection substrate 500 by the transmission line H8.

As for the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as described above (configuration B1), the transmission line H8 uses more lines than the transmission line H3, so that the connectors CN2B and CN2C can be downsized. Along with the realization, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is separately transmitted.

When not only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) but also 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is used in the downstream board after the front frame LED connection board 500 provided on the door 6, the inner frame LED relay board 400 located upstream thereof By generating and supplying a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), the wiring and circuit configuration for power supply can be made more efficient.
That is, it is possible to eliminate the need for transmission of a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400, and further, a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for each board of the door 6. There is no need to adopt a configuration that does.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration B6-2) in addition to (configuration B6-1).
(Structure B6-2)
A buffer circuit is mounted on the second substrate, and the second power supply voltage is used as the power supply voltage of the buffer circuit.

As an example of the buffer circuit referred to here, the buffer circuits 402 and 403 of FIG. 13 correspond.
The buffer circuits 402 and 403 operate using the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the 5V generation unit 410 of the inner frame LED relay board 400 as the power supply voltage.

That is, it is the inner frame LED relay board 400 and the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) downstream of the inner frame LED relay board 400 that is provided with the 5V generator 410 to generate the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). By using.
In other words, since the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is used downstream of the inner frame LED relay board 400 and later, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated on the most upstream board within the usage range of the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB). do. Then, a configuration is adopted in which a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is transmitted to a substrate on the downstream side that uses the power supply voltage.

For example, the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400 is the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, the side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit lower right LED board 620, and the button LED connection board 640. Used in.
In each figure, there is a place where it is described as "5V DC voltage (DC5V)", but as is clear from the circuit configuration, the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is also the 5V DC voltage generated by the inner frame LED relay board 400. (DC5VB).
On the other hand, since the button LED substrate 660 does not use a 5V power supply, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied (see FIG. 34).

This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of wiring and circuit configuration for supplying a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB).
That is, the configuration is such that the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is distributed within the range of the substrate that uses the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) from the upstream to the downstream. Therefore, it is not necessary to generate or relay a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) on the unused substrate on the upstream side of the inner frame LED relay substrate 400. Of course, it is not necessary to adopt a configuration in which a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is generated from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for each substrate of the door 6.

[6.3 Connector structure]

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C1).
(Structure C1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line. The first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board and the second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board are different types of connectors.

In the case of this (configuration C1), the corresponding example (specific example 3) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 3)
-First board: Power supply board 300
-Second board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
-Third board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・ First transmission line: Transmission line H3
-Second transmission line: Transmission line H8
-First connector: Connector CN1B
-Second connector: Connector CN2B

The connectors CN1B and CN2B in this case are shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the specifications thereof are as described above, and different types of connectors are used. In particular, the connector CN2B connecting the downstream side is smaller than the connector CN1B connecting the upstream side.
That is, in the power supply board 300, the inner frame LED relay board 400, and the front frame LED connection board 500 that are electrically connected from the upstream to the downstream, the inner frame LED relay board 400 has the upstream connector CN1B and the downstream connector CN2B. By different types, it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate on the downstream side, which is advantageous for arranging parts such as the substrate on the downstream side.

In particular, on the downstream side, it is desired to arrange a substrate for controlling or relaying the most downstream device, for example, a motor, a sensor, an LED substrate, or the like at a position close to the substrate. Of course, it is often close to a movable object. Then, it is desirable that the substrate area is as small as possible. Therefore, being able to reduce the substrate size on the downstream side leads to an increase in the degree of freedom in design. Further, a substrate suitable for using a complicated production device structure can be realized.

The specific example corresponding to (Structure C1) is not limited to the above (Specific Example 3). For example, the following boards (and connectors) can be exemplified as an example corresponding to a second board having a different type of first connector and a second connector.

-Front frame LED connection board 500 (upstream side connector CN2C and other downstream side connectors)
-Relay board 550 (upstream connector CN1D and downstream connector CN2D)
・ Side unit upper right LED board 600 (upstream side connector CN1E and other downstream side connectors)
・ Side unit lower right LED board 620 (upstream side connector CN3F and other downstream side connectors)
-Button LED connection board 640 (upstream connector CN1G and other downstream connectors)
-LED connection board 700 (upstream connector CN1J and other downstream connectors)
-Decorative board 740 (upstream connector CN1L and other downstream connectors)
-Relay board 760 (upstream connector CN1M and other downstream connectors)
-LED board 780 (upstream connector CN1N and downstream connector CN2N)
・ Relay board 800 under the back of the board (upstream connector CN1Q and other downstream connectors)

Then, when any of these is considered as the second substrate, the upstream thereof can be considered as the first substrate and the downstream thereof can be considered as the third substrate.
Even in each of these examples, by using a small connector on the downstream side, it is possible to make it advantageous for arranging parts such as a substrate on the downstream side.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C2).
(Structure C2)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line. The second connector connecting the second transmission line on the second board has a larger number of pins than the first connector connecting the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as those in (Specific Example 3) of the above (Structure C1). be able to.

The connector CN1B has 28 pins and the connector CN2B has 30 pins (see FIG. 13). The specifications are also as described above.
In this case, the main reason why the number of pins increases on the downstream side is that the number of pins assigned to the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is increased as described above, and the transmission of the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) is started. It is the cause.
Increasing the number of pins reduces the current load on one pin, which makes the connector CN2B smaller than the connector CN1B. For example, one having a low rated current can be adopted.
Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C3).
(Structure C3)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line. The second connector that connects the second transmission line on the second board has a smaller rated current than the first connector that connects the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as those in (Specific Example 3) of the above (Structure C1). be able to.

As described above, the rated current of the connector CN1B is 3A, and the rated current of the connector CN2B is 2A.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side adopts a small one having a small rated current. Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.
In order to use a connector having a small rated current, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted over a larger number of lines as described above.

The specific example corresponding to (configuration C3) is not limited to the above (specific example 3), and various examples are assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C4-1).
(Configuration C4-1)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line. The second connector connecting the second transmission line on the second board has a narrower terminal pitch than the first connector connecting the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as those in (Specific Example 3) of the above (Structure C1). be able to.

As described above, the terminal pitch of the connector CN1B is 2 mm, and the terminal pitch of the connector CN2B is 1.5 mm.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side adopts a small connector having a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.
In order to use a small connector having a narrow terminal pitch, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted over a larger number of lines as described above.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C4-2) in addition to (configuration C4-1).
(Configuration C4-2)
The contact diameter of the second connector connecting the second transmission line on the second board is smaller than that of the first connector connecting the first transmission line on the second board.

As described above, the contact diameter of the connector CN1B is 0.7 mm, and the contact diameter of the connector CN2B is 0.65 mm.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side adopts a small connector having a narrow terminal pitch and a small contact diameter. Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

The specific examples corresponding to (configuration C4-1) and (configuration C4-2) are not limited to the above (specific example 3), and various examples are assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration C5).
(Structure C5)
The game machine 1 includes a first board, a second board connected to the first board by a first transmission line, and a third board connected to the second board by a second transmission line. The second connector connecting the second transmission line on the second board has a smaller housing size than the first connector connecting the first transmission line on the second board.

Examples corresponding to the first board, the second board, the third board, the first transmission line, the second transmission line, the first connector, and the second connector are the same as those in (Specific Example 3) of the above (Structure C1). be able to.

As described above as sizes S1, S2, and S3, the housing size of the connector CN2B is smaller than the housing size of the connector CN1B.
That is, the connector CN2B on the downstream side adopts a small connector having a narrow terminal pitch. Therefore, it is advantageous for reducing the size of the substrate on the downstream side, and the same effect as in the case of the above (configuration C1) can be obtained.

The specific example corresponding to (configuration C5) is not limited to the above (specific example 3), and various examples are assumed as in the case of (configuration C1).

[6.4 Wiring route]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D1-1).
(Structure D1-1)
The gaming machine 1 is connected to the first board, a second board connected to the first board by the first transmission line and receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, and the second board by the second transmission line. A third substrate that receives a signal for driving control of the effect means is provided, and the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is larger than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. Is shorter, and the area of the substrate surface of the third substrate is smaller than that of the second substrate.

In the case of this (configuration D1-1), the corresponding example (specific example 4) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 4)
-First board: Relay board 550
-Second board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Third board: LED board 630 on the side unit
-First transmission line: Transmission line H10
-Second transmission line: Transmission line H12

FIG. 54 shows a wiring path between the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, the side unit upper right LED board 600, and the side unit upper LED board 630. In the substrate arrangement described with reference to FIG. 8, FIG. 54 shows the wiring paths of the transmission lines H9, H10, and H12 with broken lines, and the connectors CN3C, CN1D, CN2D, CN1E, CN2E, and CN1T used for these connections. It is a thing.

The harness as the transmission line H9 connected to the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 arranged at the lower right of the door 6 faces upward along the left side of the door 6 and is directed to the right near the upper end. The route reaches the connector CN1D of the relay board 550.
The harness as the transmission line H10 connected to the connector CN2D of the relay board 550 is a path from the upper end of the door 6 to the connector CN1E of the side unit upper right LED board 600 attached to the side unit 10 along the upper right corner. NS.
The harness as the transmission line H12 connected to the connector CN2E of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit is a path that proceeds so as to return to the path of the transmission line H10 and reaches the connector CN1T of the LED board 630 on the side unit.

Here, in FIG. 54, attention is paid to the relay board 550 which is the first board, the side unit upper right LED board 600 which is the second board, and the LED board 630 on the side unit which is the third board.
First, the relay board 550 and the LED board 630 on the side unit are in a positional relationship so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction (the LED board 630 on the side unit is on the front side (player side)).
The relay board 550 and the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit are located at distant positions near the upper end portion and the right end portion of the door 6.
Obviously, the distance between the relay board 550 and the LED board 630 on the side unit is shorter than the distance between the relay board 550 and the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit.

Further, as is clear from this figure, the area of the substrate surface of the side unit upper LED substrate 630, which is the third substrate, is smaller than that of the side unit upper right LED substrate 600, which is the second substrate.

That is, considering the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit and the LED board 630 on the side unit, the LED board 630 on the side unit is downstream, but the board area is reduced on the downstream side.
There is a demand for a smaller substrate area as the substrate is located on the downstream side. There is a situation that the position of the board is closer to the motor, the sensor, the movable body parts, etc. on the downstream side, and it is larger because it is closer to the front of the gaming machine 1 which is the player side by mounting an LED or the like. This is because it is easy for disadvantages and inconveniences to occur when the substrate has an area. For example, the arrangement of the substrate may limit the operation of moving objects and the decoration.
In the above (configuration D1-1), the area of the LED substrate 630 on the side unit is smaller than that of the LED substrate 600 on the upper right side of the side unit, so that the configuration is adapted to the circumstances of the substrate on the downstream side. This brings about an increase in the degree of freedom in layout design and design.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D1-2) in addition to the above (configuration D1-1).
(Structure D1-2)
The third board is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first wiring.

As shown in FIG. 54, the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, is located on the path of the transmission line H10, which is the first wiring. Therefore, the route of the transmission line H12 is set so as to return to the route of the transmission line H10.
Such wiring route setting is very effective for miniaturization of the LED board 630 on the side unit.

The LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit to which signals are transmitted from the relay board 550 is the most upstream of each board in the side unit 10. For example, the LED board 630 on the side unit and the LED board 630 on the side unit are located downstream.
Further, the side unit upper right LED board 600 includes a side unit upper right movable object motor 104 connected to the connector CN4E, a side unit upper right movable object solenoid 105 connected to the connector CN5E, a blower 106 connected to the connector CN6E, and a connector. There is a sensor in the side unit device 101 connected to the CN7E.

That is, considering the substrate which is the base point of each part in the side unit, the circuit configuration becomes complicated and the substrate area has to be widened. The number of lines for wiring also increases, and the size and number of connector CNs tend to increase.
Therefore, the role of the substrate as the base point in the side unit 10 is assigned to the substrate at the upper right corner of the frame where a relatively large area can be secured. That is, the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit. Assuming a substantially circular game surface, it is easy to arrange a substrate having a large area on the corners of the frame. The upper right corner is also substantially the center of the side unit 10.

Then, the signal is transmitted to each part in the side unit 10. In this case, there is a member arranged at a position on the wiring path of the transmission line H10 which is the first wiring. That is, it is the LED board 630 on the side unit which is the third board.
In such a configuration, first, the total wiring length to each part in the side unit 10 can be shortened. Each part includes an LED board 630 on the side unit, an LED board 620 on the lower right side of the side unit, a movable object motor 104 on the upper right side of the side unit, a movable object solenoid 105 on the upper right side of the side unit, a blower 106, and a side unit device 101.

Since wiring is performed to each of these parts from the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit substantially in the center of the side unit 10, wiring can be performed with a short line length in the arrangement direction of each part.
Let us consider that the LED board 630 on the side unit close to the relay board 550 is used as the base point. From the positional relationship with the relay board 550, it seems that it is preferable at first glance. However, when wiring is performed to each part with the LED board 630 on the side unit close to the relay board 550 as a base point, wiring is formed in parallel from the LED board 630 on the side unit to each part. Then, for example, a number of wires overlap around the upper right corner of the door 6, and as a result, the total wiring length becomes long. In addition, as the number of wires to be wired increases, it becomes difficult to store the wires.
By using the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit as the base point and, as a result, a part where the going / returning routes overlap like the transmission line H12, the total wiring length can be shortened and the wiring wires can be concentrated. It will be relaxed.

On top of that, the miniaturization of the LED substrate 630 on the side unit can be promoted. The LED board 630 on the side unit needs to receive only the signal and the power supply voltage necessary for its own operation by the connector CN1T as the most downstream board, and a small connector can be used. In addition, no other connector is required and the circuit configuration is simple. For example, in the case of the example of FIG. 32, the LED driver 631 and the light emitting unit 632 may be mounted, and the configuration is simple.
From these facts, it is possible to promote the miniaturization of the LED substrate 630 on the side unit, thereby being suitable as a substrate on the downstream side and promoting the above-mentioned effects such as the degree of freedom in design.

That is, the fact that the third board is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first wiring in (Structure D1-2) means that the second board serves as a base point for wiring to the member including the third board. This means that it is possible to make wiring more efficient and to reduce the size of the third substrate than simply wiring in order of closeness.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-1).
(Structure D2-1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board, a second board connected to the first board by the first transmission line and receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, and the second board by the second transmission line. A third substrate that receives a signal for driving control of the effect means is provided, and the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is larger than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. Is shorter, and the number of electric components mounted on the third substrate is smaller than that of the second substrate.

In this case as well, the above (Specific Example 4) is assumed as a corresponding example.
It should be noted that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the LED board 630 (third board) on the side unit is rather than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the LED board 600 (second board) on the upper right side of the side unit. As mentioned above, the distance of is shorter.

An electric component that compares the size of a number may be considered as all electric components. For example, it is an electric component such as an IC chip, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, and a connector.

Alternatively, the electric component may be considered as an electric component (an electric component excluding the passive element) that consumes power by receiving a power supply voltage supply. Specifically, the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit includes LED drivers 605, 606, motor drivers 608, 609, buffer circuits 604, 607, LEDs of the light emitting unit 612, and the like (see FIGS. 27 and 28). The LED substrate 630 on the side unit includes an LED driver 631 and an LED of the light emitting unit 632 (see FIG. 32).

Further, the electric component may be considered as an LED as an electric component (an electric component that receives the effect operation control) that directly performs the effect operation.
Therefore, the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit is the LED of the light emitting unit 612 (see FIG. 27), and the LED substrate 630 on the side unit is the LED of 632 (see FIG. 32).

In any case, the number of electric components mounted on the LED board 630 (third board) on the side unit is smaller than that of the LED board 600 (second board) on the upper right side of the side unit.
As a result, the area of the LED substrate 630 on the side unit can be reduced. Therefore, the effects described in (Structure D1-1) of downsizing the substrate on the downstream side and thereby improving the design and the degree of freedom of design can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-2) in addition to the above (configuration D2-1).
(Configuration D2-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. As a result, the effect described in the above (configuration D1-2) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D2-3) in addition to the above (configuration D2-1).
(Configuration D2-3)
The area of the substrate surface of the third substrate is smaller than that of the second substrate. As a result, the effect described in (Structure D1-1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D3-1).
(Structure D3-1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board, a second board connected to the first board by the first transmission line and receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, and the second board by the second transmission line. A third substrate that receives a signal for driving control of the effect means is provided, and the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is larger than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. Is shorter, and the third board consumes less power in the mounted circuit than the second board.

In this case as well, the above (Specific Example 4) is assumed as a corresponding example.
It should be noted that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the LED board 630 (third board) on the side unit is rather than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the LED board 600 (second board) on the upper right side of the side unit. As mentioned above, the distance of is shorter.

As described above, the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit has a larger number of parts than the LED board 630 on the side unit, and consumes more current than the LED board 630 on the side unit.
Comparing the circuit configurations, it is clear that the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit consumes more current due to the difference in the number of LEDs of the light emitting unit 612 and the light emitting unit 632 and the difference in the number of LED drivers mounted. ..
In other words, the LED board 630 on the side unit adopts a circuit configuration that reduces power consumption. As a result, the LED substrate 630 on the side unit can reduce the substrate area. Therefore, the effects described in (Structure D1-1) of downsizing the substrate on the downstream side and thereby improving the design and the degree of freedom of design can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D3-2) in addition to the above (configuration D3-1).
(Structure D3-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. As a result, the effect described in the above (configuration D1-2) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D4-1).
(Configuration D4-1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board, a second board connected to the first board by the first transmission line and receiving a signal for driving control of the effect means, and the second board by the second transmission line. A third substrate that receives a signal for driving control of the effect means is provided, and the distance between the first substrate and the third substrate is larger than the distance between the first substrate and the second substrate. Is shorter, and the motor drive control signal is included in the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted on the first transmission line, and the drive control of the effect means transmitted on the second transmission line is included. The signal for motor drive control is not included in the signal for.

In this case as well, the above (Specific Example 4) is assumed as a corresponding example.
It should be noted that the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the LED board 630 (third board) on the side unit is rather than the distance between the relay board 550 (first board) and the LED board 600 (second board) on the upper right side of the side unit. As mentioned above, the distance of is shorter.

The signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H10 and received by the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, which is the second board, are, for example, the enable signal ENABLE_L, the clock signal CLK_P, and the reset signal RESET_P shown in FIG. Is. These signals may be used to control the LED driver 605 (FIG. 27) or the LED driver 606 and the motor drivers 608, 609 (FIG. 28), as detailed in FIGS. 24-29. do. That is, signals for LED light emission and motor drive control are included.

The signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H12 and received by the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, are, for example, the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET shown in FIG. Is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 631.

That is, the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H10 includes the signal for motor drive control, and the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H12 includes the signal for drive control. The motor drive control signal is not included.
This is because the LED board 600 on the upper right side unit (or the board downstream other than the LED board 630 on the side unit), which is the second board, has a motor driver, while the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, has a motor. It means that you do not have a driver.
A relatively large current is used to drive the motor. In addition, a large number of lines is required due to the circumstances of motor drive such as 3-phase drive and 4-phase drive. Therefore, it is difficult to miniaturize the substrate having the motor driver.
Conversely, by assuming that the LED board 630 on the side unit is not a board on which the motor driver is mounted, miniaturization is promoted, and miniaturization is facilitated as the most downstream board. Then, due to the miniaturization, the effect described in the above (configuration D1-1) can be obtained.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration D4-2) in addition to the above (configuration D4-1).
(Configuration D4-2)
The third substrate is attached at a position on the wiring path of the first transmission line. As a result, the effect described in the above (configuration D1-2) can be obtained.

[6.5 Number of power supplies for transmission line H (Part 2)]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E1).
(Structure E1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third board for receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage, the third board has a smaller board surface area than the second board, and is used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line. The number is less than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

In the case of this (configuration E1), the corresponding example (specific example 5) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 5)
-First board: Relay board 550
-Second board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Third board: LED board 630 on the side unit
-First transmission line: Transmission line H10
-Second transmission line: Transmission line H12
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)

Here, the area of the substrate surface of the side unit upper LED substrate 630, which is the third substrate, is smaller than that of the side unit upper right LED substrate 600, which is the second substrate. FIG. 8 shows the LED substrate 630 on the side unit and the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit, and the size of the area of such a substrate surface is clear from the figure.

Further, as can be seen from the assignment of the connector CN1E in FIG. 24, the transmission line H10 uses two lines for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
On the other hand, as can be seen from the assignments of the connector CN2E of FIG. 26 and the connector CN1T of FIG. 32, the transmission line H12 uses one line for a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

That is, in the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, the number of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for transmission in the transmission to the LED board 630 on the side unit is reduced. As a result, the connector CN1T having a small number of terminals can be used on the LED board 630 side on the side unit.

The mounting area of each board is often limited by the arrangement of surrounding components. For example, in the present embodiment, the area of the LED board 630 on the side unit is reduced due to the arrangement of surrounding parts, etc., but in that case, by reducing the size of the connector CN1T, the parts shown in FIG. 32 are used. That is, it is easy to secure an arrangement area for LEDs, LED drivers 631, and the like.
As described above, when it is desired to reduce the substrate area on the downstream side or when there is no choice but to reduce it (configuration E1), it is effective.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E2-1).
(Structure E2-1)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third board for receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage is provided, and the number of electrical components mounted on the third board is smaller than that of the second board, and the first power supply voltage is transmitted on the second transmission line. The number of lines used is less than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

In this case as well, the above (Specific Example 5) is assumed as a corresponding example.
The electric parts may be considered as all electric parts, but more preferably, all or main electric parts that consume power based on the power supply voltage of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system which is the first power supply voltage. do.
Therefore, specifically, the LED substrate 600 on the upper right side unit is an LED driver 605, 606, a motor driver 608, 609, an LED of the light emitting unit 612, and the like (see FIGS. 27 and 28).
The LED substrate 630 on the side unit includes an LED driver 631 and an LED of the light emitting unit 632 (see FIG. 32).

Further, only the LED may be considered as the main electric component that consumes power based on the power supply voltage of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system. Comparing the number of LEDs of the light emitting unit 612 and the light emitting unit 632, the number of LEDs of the side unit upper right LED board 600 is clearly larger.

That is, the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit consumes a large amount of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system by itself, and also supplies the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit. In this case, the LED board 630 on the side unit consumes relatively little power.

Due to such a configuration, there is no problem even if the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on the transmission line H12 is smaller than the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on the transmission line H10. Will not be. That is, since the amount of current to be transmitted is also reduced, there is no problem due to transmission on one line.
Therefore, the number of lines is reduced, the size of the connector on the board on the downstream side is reduced, and the configuration is advantageous for mounting on a board having a relatively small board area.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E2-2) in addition to the above (configuration E2-1).
(Structure E2-2)
The area of the substrate surface of the third substrate is smaller than that of the second substrate.

As described above, the LED substrate 630 on the side unit, which is the third substrate on the downstream side, has a relatively small area. In this case, it is very useful in design that the connector CN1T can be miniaturized.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E3).
(Structure E3)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third board for receiving the supply of the first power supply voltage is provided, and the third board consumes less power in the mounted circuit than the second board, and is used for transmitting the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line. The number of lines is smaller than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in the first transmission line.

In this case as well, the above (Specific Example 5) is assumed as a corresponding example.
As described above, the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit has a larger number of parts than the LED board 630 on the side unit, and consumes more current than the LED board 630 on the side unit.
Comparing the circuit configurations, it is clear that the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit consumes more current due to the difference in the number of LEDs of the light emitting unit 612 and the light emitting unit 632 and the difference in the number of LED drivers mounted. ..

Due to such a configuration, there is no problem even if the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on the transmission line H12 is smaller than the number of lines used for transmitting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on the transmission line H10. Will not be. That is, since the amount of current to be transmitted is also reduced, there is no problem due to transmission on one line.
Therefore, the number of lines is reduced, the size of the connector on the board on the downstream side is reduced, and the configuration is advantageous for mounting on a board having a relatively small board area.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration E4).
(Structure E4)
The game machine 1 is connected to the first board by a first transmission line, a second board which is connected to the first board by a first transmission line and receives a supply of a first power supply voltage, and the second board by a second transmission line. A third substrate for receiving a first power supply voltage is provided, and a motor drive control signal is included in the drive control signals of the effect means transmitted on the first transmission line, and the second transmission The motor drive control signal is not included in the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted on the line, and the number of lines used for transmission of the first power supply voltage in the second transmission line is the first. It is less than the number of lines for supplying the first power supply voltage in one transmission line.

In this case as well, the above (Specific Example 5) is assumed as a corresponding example.
The signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H10 and received by the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, which is the second board, are, for example, the enable signal ENABLE_L, the clock signal CLK_P, and the reset signal RESET_P shown in FIG. Is. These signals may be used to control the LED driver 605 (FIG. 27) or the LED driver 606 and the motor drivers 608, 609 (FIG. 28), as detailed in FIGS. 24-29. do. That is, signals for LED light emission and motor drive control are included.

The signals for driving control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H12 and received by the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, are, for example, the clock signal CLK, the data signal DATA, and the reset signal RESET shown in FIG. Is. These signals are used to control the LED driver 631.

That is, the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H10 includes the signal for motor drive control, and the signal for drive control of the effect means transmitted on the transmission line H12 includes the signal for drive control. The motor drive control signal is not included.

This is because the LED board 600 on the upper right side unit (or the board downstream other than the LED board 630 on the side unit), which is the second board, has a motor driver, while the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is the third board, has a motor. It means that you do not have a driver.
A relatively large current is used to drive the motor. In addition, a large number of lines is required due to the circumstances of motor drive such as 3-phase drive and 4-phase drive. If the LED board 630 on the side unit is equipped with a motor driver or is a board that relays individual motors, a large number of lines used for transmission of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the transmission line H12 is required. become.
In the case of this example, the motor drive control signal is not transmitted to the LED board 630 on the side unit. That is, the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit is not provided with the function of driving the motor. As a result, the circuit of the LED board 630 on the side unit is simplified and the connector is miniaturized, and the miniaturization of the LED board 630 on the side unit, which is arranged relatively forward at the most downstream, can be promoted.

[6.6 Power supply path]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F1).
(Structure F1)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) that is openable and closable to the inner frame 2, and a game board 3 (replaceably attached to the inner frame 2). The exchange member), the effect control board 30 attached to the game board 3, and the power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, and the signal for driving control of the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is The output is output from the effect control board 30, and the power supply voltage for driving the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is supplied from the power source board 300 without passing through the game board 3.

In the case of this (configuration F1), a corresponding specific example is assumed as follows.
-Direction means: LEDs, motors, blowers, etc. provided on the door 6. If the inner frame 2 is provided with an LED or the like, it is also included.
Signals for drive control of the effect means: Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M input to the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
-Power supply voltage for driving the effect means: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).

As described above, in reality, not only 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) but also 12V DC voltage (DC12V), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB, DC5V), 12V for the operation of various effect means in the door 6. Motor drive voltages (MOT12V, MOT12VA) are used, all of which are voltages based on the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) supplied from the power supply board 300 to the inner frame LED relay board 400. Therefore, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) including these becomes the power supply voltage for driving the effect means.

As described above, the clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, and ENABLE_M from the effect control board 30 are the boards of the door 6 downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400. The operation of each LED or motor is executed accordingly.
Further, the 12V DC voltage (DC12V) from the power supply board 300 and the voltage based on the 12V DC voltage are supplied to each board of the door 6 downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400, and are used as the power supply voltage for the operation of each LED and the motor. NS.
That is, the effect means of the door 6 is configured to operate using the power supply voltage supplied by the transmission line H3 in response to the drive signal supplied from the effect control board 30 by the transmission lines H6 and H7 shown in FIG. ing.

With such a configuration, it is not necessary to supply the power supply voltage from the power supply board 300 to the door 6 side via the effect control board 30, and the efficiency of the power supply wiring can be improved.
In particular, the drive signal and the power supply voltage are collectively sent to the front frame LED connection board 500 of the door 6 via the inner frame LED relay board 400 arranged in the inner frame 2 like the power supply board 300 to improve the wiring efficiency. ing. Regarding the power supply wiring to the door 6, it also means that the unnecessary wraparound to the game board 3 can be eliminated.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F2).
(Configuration F2)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) that is openable and closable to the inner frame 2, and a game board 3 (replaceably attached to the inner frame 2). The exchange member), the effect control board 30 attached to the game board 3, and the power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, and the signal for driving control of the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is The power supply voltage for driving the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is supplied from the effect control board 30 without passing through the game board 3, and the effect means provided on the game board 3 is supplied. The signal for driving control is output from the effect control board 30, and the power supply voltage for driving the effect means provided on the game board 3 is supplied from the effect control board 30.

In the case of this (configuration F2), the corresponding specific example is the same as in F1 described above, but as the effect means, there are an effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 and an effect means provided on the game board 3.
The effect means provided on the game board 3 is an LED, a motor, or the like driven by each substrate in the game board 3 of FIG.
The power supply voltage for driving the effect means provided on the game board 3 is a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and a 35V DC voltage (DC35V) supplied to the connector CN1J in FIG. 36. ..

In this case, the same effect as the above (configuration F1) can be obtained with respect to the wiring of the door 6 to the effect means.
In addition, the efficiency of wiring for the effect means of the game board 3 is realized. That is, since the effect control board 30 is provided on the game board 3, the effect control board 30 collectively sends the power supply voltage and the signal for drive control to the LED connection board 700 by the transmission line H20. Power supply wiring can be eliminated. As a result, wiring in the game board 3 can be performed efficiently.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration F3).
(Structure F3)
The game machine 1 includes an inner frame 2 (frame member), a door 6 (door member) that is openable and closable to the inner frame 2, and a game board 3 (replaceably attached to the inner frame 2). (Replacement member), the effect control board 30 attached to the game board 3, the power supply board 300 attached to the inner frame 2, the first board attached to the inner frame 2, and the second board attached to the door 6. In the first board, a signal for driving control of the effect means provided on the inner frame 2 or the door 6 is input from the effect control board 30, and a power supply voltage for driving the effect means is input to the power supply board 300. The signal for driving control of the effect means and the power supply voltage for driving the effect means are input from the player without passing through the game board 3 via the first connector arranged on the first board. 2 It is designed to output to the board.

In the case of this (configuration F3), the corresponding specific example is as follows.
-Direction means: LEDs, motors, blowers, etc. provided on the door 6. If the inner frame 2 is provided with an LED or the like, it is also included.
・ First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
-Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
Signals for drive control of the effect means: Clear signals CLR_L, CLR_M, clock signals CLK_L, CLK_M, data signals DATA_L, DATA_M, enable signals ENABLE_L, ENABLE_M input to the inner frame LED relay board 400 in FIG.
-Power supply voltage for driving the effect means: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB).
-Connector: Connector CN2B in FIG.

As a result, in addition to obtaining the same effect as the above (configuration F1) with respect to the wiring to the effect means of the door 6, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the wiring downstream from the inner frame LED relay board 400. That is, the signal wiring from the effect control board 30 (frame LED relay board 840) and the power supply wiring from the power supply board 300 are collectively connected by the connector CN2B to the downstream front frame LED connection board 500 by the transmission line H8. .. This makes it unnecessary to use a plurality of connectors for the front frame LED connection board 500. Further, since the transmission line H8 is the wiring of the opening / closing portion between the inner frame 2 and the door 6, it is preferable to combine the transmission lines H8 with a pair of connectors (CN2B, CN2C) so that the wiring is not disturbed even at the time of opening / closing.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the inner frame LED relay board 400 uses two connectors CN1B and CN4B to connect to the upstream side.
The connector CN1B is used for wiring to and from the game board 3, and the connector CN4B is used for wiring inside the inner frame 2. Therefore, it is preferable to use another connector. In this case, the above-mentioned improvement in wiring efficiency is realized in the sense that one connector CN2B collectively transmits to the front frame LED connection board 500 on the downstream side.

[6.7 Separation of power supply voltage system]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-1).
(Structure G1-1)
The game machine 1 has a substrate provided with a first circuit for producing a light emitting effect and a second circuit for producing a movable body effect, and the substrate has a predetermined level input from another substrate. A first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage to the first circuit as a first power supply voltage, and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to a production motor driven by the second circuit as a second power supply voltage. And are formed, and the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G1-1), the corresponding example (concrete example 6) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 6)
・ Board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-First circuit: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, and a circuit based on electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. and conductor patterns provided together with these to produce light emission (see FIGS. 27 and 56).
-Second circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and circuits based on electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. and conductor patterns provided for the production of movable objects together with these (see FIGS. 28 and 56).
-Direction motor: side unit lower right movable object motor 103, side unit upper right movable object motor 104, etc. (see FIGS. 28 and 55)
-First power supply line: Power supply line PLa (see FIG. 56)
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLCc (see FIG. 56)
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
-Second power supply voltage: 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 670 (see FIGS. 29 and 55)

Here, for the purpose of explaining the configuration, the power supply system between the upper right LED board 600 of the side unit and the boards upstream and downstream thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.
FIG. 55 shows a power supply between the relay board 550, the side unit upper right LED board 600, the side unit lower right LED board 620, the side unit upper LED board 630, the most downstream motor, and the like in the same format as in FIG. 48 above. Shows voltage transmission.

The connector CN1D of the relay board 550 is connected to the connector CN3C of the front frame LED connection board 500 of FIG. 48 by a transmission line H9.
In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 supplies a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) on one line and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) on three lines. Five tracks are used for the ground.

As shown in FIG. 55, a transmission line H10 supplies a 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) to the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit from the relay board 550 on one line, and a 12V DC voltage on two lines. (DC12VB) is supplied. Four lines are used for the ground (see connector CN2D in FIG. 23 and connector CN1E in FIG. 24).

The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) further downstream.
In the transmission line H12 from the connector CN2E, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit by one line. In this transmission line H12, two lines are used as grounds (see FIG. 26).

Further, the transmission line H11 from the connector CN3E transmits 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit by one line, respectively. ing. Here, two lines are used as the ground (see FIG. 26).
Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN7E to the sensor 101S of the side unit device 101 by one line. Here, one line is used as the ground (see FIG. 25).

Here, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit. As described above, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated by the power supply separation / protection circuit 670 (see FIG. 29) using the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and is supplied to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit by the transmission line H11. ing.
Further, the separated motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from the connector CN4E to the side unit upper right movable object motor 104, transmitted from the connector CN5E to the side unit upper right movable object solenoid 105, and transmitted from the connector CN6E to the blower 106 ( As mentioned above, see FIG. 28).

In the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is separated by the power supply separation / protection circuit 671 (see FIG. 29) to be the power supply voltage of the motor drivers 608 and 609 inside the board.

The lower right LED board 620 of the side unit supplies the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), 5V DC voltage (DC5VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V) to the downstream devices, respectively.
That is, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN4F to the movable object position detection switch 102 at the lower right of the side unit by one line. Here, one track is used as the ground. Further, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from the connector CN1F to the movable object motor 103 at the lower right of the side unit by two lines. Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN2F to the LED substrate 625 by one line (see FIG. 30 above).

FIG. 56 shows a power supply system separated from a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit.
For the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input to the connector CN1E, the power supply line PLa is formed as it is, and is supplied to the LED drivers 605 and 606, the light emitting unit 612, and the connectors CN2E, CN3E, and CN7E.

Further, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated by the power supply separation / protection circuit 670 (see FIG. 29) of FIG. 56, and the power supply line PLc is formed. As a result, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is used as a reference voltage in the motor drivers 608 and 609, and from the connectors CN4E, CN5E, and CN6E, as shown in FIG. 55, the side unit upper right movable object motor 104, solenoid 105, and blower. It is supplied to a downstream device such as 106.

Further, the power supply separation / protection circuit 671 (see FIG. 29) of FIG. 56 separates the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) to form the power supply line PLb. As a result, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor drivers 608 and 609 as an operating voltage.

From FIG. 56, it is understood that the specific example 6 corresponds to the configuration G1.

Further, in the above-mentioned (configuration G1-1), an example (specific example 7) corresponding as follows is also assumed.
(Specific example 7)
-Board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・ First circuit: A circuit using electrical components such as wiring, resistors, and capacitors related to signals for light emission effect, which is provided for light emission effect by the LED board downstream of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C. Circuit: Motor drivers 510, 511, and electrical parts such as resistors, capacitors, and connectors provided for the production of movable objects, and motors for circuit / production using conductor patterns: Connector CN10, transmission line H15, button LED connection board Motors (not shown) connected via connectors CN1G and CN3G (FIG. 33) of 640 ・ First power supply line: Power supply line PLp (see FIG. 57)
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLr (see FIG. 57)
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
-Second power supply voltage: 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 520

The transmission of the power supply voltage between the front frame LED connection board 500, the upstream inner frame LED relay board 400, and the downstream relay board 550 and the button LED connection board 640 is as shown in FIGS. 48 and 55. ..
FIG. 57 shows a power supply system separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) in the front frame LED connection board 500.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) input to the connector CN2C forms the power supply line PLp as it is, and is supplied to the LED driver 509 and the connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C.

Further, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated by the power supply separation / protection circuit 520 (see FIG. 15) of FIG. 57, and the power supply line PLr is formed. As a result, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is supplied from the connector CN10C to the button LED connection board 640 by the transmission line H15 while being used as the reference voltage by the motor drivers 510 and 511 (see FIG. 48). This motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is supplied to the motor of the vibrating device from the connector CN4G of the button LED connection board 640 (see FIG. 33).

Further, the power supply separation / protection circuit 521 (see FIG. 19) of FIG. 57 separates the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) to form the power supply line PLq. As a result, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor drivers 510 and 511 as an operating voltage.

From FIG. 57, it is understood that the specific example 7 corresponds to the configuration G1.

That is, such (configuration G1-1) has an effect of stabilizing the power supply voltage of the LED system by separating the LED power supply system and the motor power supply system via a protection circuit. That is, it makes it difficult for power supply noise due to motor drive to be mixed in, and makes it difficult for the influence of voltage fluctuation due to motor drive to occur.
LEDs are driven to emit light very often, but motors are sometimes driven with high current consumption. It is possible to prevent the light emission from becoming unstable due to the influence of the motor power supply voltage system.

Further, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of the specific example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 7 separate the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) from the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). .. That is, it is not a power supply system branched into two systems on the upstream board. Therefore, the number of power supply systems between the board and the board on the upstream side can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and the number of connector pins can be reduced in the design.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-2) in addition to the above (configuration G1-1).
(Structure G1-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is output to the outside of the substrate.

Also in the case of this (configuration G1-2), the above specific examples 6 and 7 can be mentioned.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of the specific example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 7 have a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and a motor drive voltage (MOT12V). It is output from the connector CN to the board or device downstream.
Therefore, it is possible to use the power supply properly even for the motor on the downstream side and the LED substrate.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-3) together with the above (configuration G1-1) or (configuration G1-2).
(Structure G1-3)
The protection circuit is a protection circuit using a diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line to the first power supply line.

Specific examples 6 and 7 described above include power supply separation / protection circuits 670 and 520 corresponding to protection circuits, both of which use diodes D8E (see FIG. 29) and D18C (see FIG. 15) for preventing reverse current. ing.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emission operation from becoming unstable due to the reverse current from the motor power supply voltage system (power supply line PLc, PLr which is the second power supply line) having a large amount of current, and one power supply voltage by the diode. The system can be easily divided into two power supply voltage systems.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-4) in addition to the above (configuration G1-3).
(Structure G1-4)
The diode is a Schottky barrier diode.

The above-mentioned diodes D8E and D18C are Schottky barrier diodes. Since it is a Schottky barrier diode with a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the second power supply voltage, can be efficiently extracted from the input power supply voltage of 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is relatively large. It is suitable as a motor power source for current consumption.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G2-1).
(Structure G2-1)
The game machine 1 has a substrate provided with a first circuit for producing a light emitting effect and a second circuit for producing a movable body effect, and the substrate has a predetermined level input from another substrate. A first power supply line that supplies a power supply voltage to the first circuit as a first power supply voltage and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to the second circuit as a second power supply voltage are formed. The first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G2-1), the corresponding example (concrete example 8) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 8)
・ Board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-First circuit: LED driver 605, light-emitting unit 612, and circuits based on electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. and conductor patterns provided for light-emitting effect.-Second circuit: motor drivers 608, 609, and Along with these, circuits using electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., and conductor patterns provided to produce movable objects ・ First power supply line: Power supply line PLa (see FIG. 56)
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLb (see FIG. 56)
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
-Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 671

Further, in the case of this (configuration G2-1), a corresponding example (specific example 9) is also assumed as follows.
(Specific example 9)
-Board: Front frame LED connection board 500
・ First circuit: A circuit using electrical components such as wiring, resistors, and capacitors related to signals for light emission effect, which is provided for light emission effect by the LED board downstream of connectors CN1C, CN3C, CN4C, and CN10C. Circuit: Motor drivers 510, 511, and circuits based on electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. and conductor patterns provided for the production of movable objects together with these. First power supply line: Power supply line PLp (see FIG. 57).
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLq (see FIG. 57)
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
-Second power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 521

Such (configuration G2-1) stabilizes the power supply voltage of the LED system by separating the LED power supply system and the power supply system of the motor driver. That is, it makes it difficult for power supply noise due to motor drive to be mixed in, and makes it difficult for the influence of voltage fluctuation due to motor drive to occur.
LEDs are driven to emit light very frequently, but the motor driver that drives the motor and its peripheral circuits are susceptible to the large current consumption of the motor. It is possible to prevent the light emission from becoming unstable due to the influence of the power supply voltage system of this motor driver.

Further, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of the specific example 8 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 9 separate the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) from the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). .. That is, it is not a power supply system branched into two systems on the upstream board. Therefore, the number of power supply systems between the board and the board on the upstream side can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and the number of connector pins can be reduced in the design.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G2-2) in addition to the above (configuration G2-1).
(Structure G2-2)
The board outputs the first power supply voltage to another board.

Also in the case of this (configuration G2-2), the above specific examples 6 and 7 can be mentioned.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of the specific example 6 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 7 apply a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to the board downstream from the connector CN. It is outputting.
In the case of the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit, the downstream board is the LED board 620 on the lower right side of the side unit and the LED board 630 on the upper right side of the side unit. In the case of the front frame LED connection board 500, it is the relay board 550 (or the side unit upper right LED board 600 via the relay board 550) or the button LED connection board 640.
Therefore, even on the downstream board, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) that is not easily affected by the power supply voltage system of the motor driver can be used.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G1-3) in addition to the above (configuration G1-1) or (configuration G1-2).
(Structure G2-3)
The protection circuit is a protection circuit using a diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line to the first power supply line.

Specific examples 8 and 9 above include power supply separation / protection circuits 671 and 521 corresponding to protection circuits, both of which use diodes D7E (see FIG. 29) and D19C (see FIG. 19) for preventing reverse current. ing.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emission operation from becoming unstable due to the reverse current from the motor driver power supply voltage system (power supply lines PLb, PLq which are the second power supply lines), and the diode simplifies from one power supply voltage system. It can be divided into two power supply voltage systems.

A Schottky barrier diode may be used as the diodes D7E and D19C.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-1).
(Structure G3-1)
The game machine 1 has a substrate provided with a first circuit for producing a movable body effect, and the substrate has a power supply voltage of a predetermined level input from another board as a first power supply voltage. A first power supply line for supplying to one circuit and a second power supply line for supplying the power supply voltage to a production motor driven by the first circuit as a second power supply voltage are formed, and the first power supply line is formed. And the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit.

In the case of this (configuration G3-1), the corresponding example (specific example 10) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 10)
・ Board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-First circuit: Motor drivers 608, 609, and circuits and production motors based on electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. and conductor patterns provided for the production of movable objects together with these. Motors for production: Side unit lower right movable object motor 103 , Side unit upper right movable object motor 104, etc. ・ First power supply line: Power supply line PLb (see FIG. 56)
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLCc (see FIG. 56)
-Predetermined level power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
-Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 670, 671

Further, in the case of this (configuration G3-1), a corresponding example (specific example 11) is also assumed as follows.
(Specific Example 11)
-Board: Front frame LED connection board 500
-First circuit: Motor drivers 510, 511, and circuits using electrical components such as resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. provided for the production of movable objects and conductor patterns. Motors for production: Connector CN10, transmission line H15, buttons. Motor (not shown) connected via connectors CN1G and CN3G (FIG. 33) of the LED connection board 640. First power supply line: power supply line PLq (see FIG. 57).
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLr (see FIG. 57)
-Predetermined level power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
-Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 520, 521

Such (configuration G2-1) stabilizes the respective power supply voltages by separating the motor power supply system and the power supply system of the motor driver via a protection circuit. That is, the reverse current from the motor system driven by a large current to the power supply system of the motor driver and the mixing of power supply noise are avoided.

Further, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of the specific example 10 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 11 have a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) and a motor drive voltage (DC12VS) from the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). MOT12V) is separated. That is, it is not a power supply system branched into three systems on the upstream board. Therefore, the number of power supply systems between the board and the board on the upstream side can be reduced, and the number of harnesses and the number of connector pins can be reduced in the design.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-2) in addition to the above (configuration G3-1).
(Structure G3-2)
One or both of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is output to the outside of the substrate.

Also in the case of this (configuration G3-2), the above-mentioned specific examples 10 and 11 can be mentioned.
As can be seen from FIGS. 56 and 57, both the side unit upper right LED board 600 of the specific example 10 and the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 11 have the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) downstream from the connector CN. Output to the device. Therefore, even on the downstream side, the motor drive voltage can be set as an independent power supply voltage system, and the influence on other power supply systems can be reduced.

It should be noted that a configuration example in which a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is supplied to the motor driver on the downstream substrate is also conceivable. For example, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) may be supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 to the side unit upper right LED board 600 via the relay board 550 and used as the power supply voltage of the motor drivers 608 and 609.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-3) in addition to the above (configuration G3-1) or (configuration G3-2).
(Structure G3-3)
As the protection circuit, a protection circuit using a first diode for preventing reverse current from the first power supply line and a protection circuit using a second diode for preventing reverse current from the second power supply line are included. It is provided.

In the case of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit of the specific example 10, the power supply separation / protection circuit 671 using the first diode D7E (see FIG. 29) from the power supply line PLb and the second diode D8E (FIG. 29) from the power supply line PLc. A power supply separation / protection circuit 670 using (see) is provided.
In the case of the front frame LED connection board 500 of the specific example 11, the power supply separation / protection circuit 521 using the first diode D19C (see FIG. 19) from the power supply line PLq and the second diode D18C (FIG. 15) from the power supply line PLr. A power supply separation / protection circuit 520 using (see) is provided.

This prevents the power supply of the motor driver and the like from becoming unstable due to the reverse current from the power supply lines PLc and PLr (second power supply line) of the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the power supply of the motor having a large amount of current. Can be done.
Further, it is possible to prevent other power supply systems from becoming unstable due to reverse currents from the power supply lines PLb and PLq (first power supply line) of 12V DC voltage (DC12VS), which is the power supply voltage of the motor driver.
Further, in this case, one power supply voltage system can be easily divided into two power supply voltage systems by the first and second diodes.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-4) in addition to the above (configuration G3-3).
(Structure G3-4)
The second diode is a Schottky barrier diode.

That is, the diode D8E (see FIG. 29) and the diode D18C (see FIG. 15) use a Schottky barrier diode.
Since it is a Schottky barrier diode with a small forward voltage drop, it can efficiently extract the motor drive voltage (MOT12V), which is the second power supply voltage, from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the input power supply voltage, and consumes a relatively large amount of current. Suitable as a motor power supply.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G3-5) in addition to the above (configuration G3-3).
(Structure G3-5)
The second diode is a Schottky barrier diode, and the first diode is a diode having a higher forward voltage than the second diode.

That is, the diode D7E (see FIG. 29) and the diode D19C (see FIG. 19) are ordinary diodes having a higher forward voltage than the Schottky barrier diode. For example, a normal PN diode or the like is used.
In the case of a Schottky barrier diode, the current efficiency is good because the forward voltage is low, but the arrangement area on the substrate is relatively large. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for alignment on the substrate and tends to cause an increase in the substrate area. Therefore, a general diode having a small area is used on the motor driver side, which consumes less current than the motor. As a result, it is possible to prevent the required area from being expanded, to improve the efficiency of substrate arrangement, and to be advantageous for application to a small substrate.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-1).
(Structure G4-1)
The game machine 1 has a first electric component related to the first effect, a second electric component related to the second effect, and a first board, and the first board is input from an external board. A first power supply line that supplies a predetermined level of power supply voltage to the first electric component as a first power supply voltage, and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to the second electric component as a second power supply voltage. Is formed, the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit, and only one of the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage is the first power supply voltage. It is output from the board to the second board.

In the case of this (configuration G4-1), the corresponding example (specific example 12) is assumed as follows. The first and second effects include any one of light emission effect by LED, movable body effect by motor / solenoid, image display effect on liquid crystal panel, vibration effect, blower effect, sound effect, and the like. In the following example, the first effect is a light emitting effect and the second effect is a movable body effect.

(Specific Example 12)
・ First board: Front frame LED connection board 500
-Second board: Relay board 550 and side unit upper right LED board 600
・ First electrical component: Electrical component (circuit component or device) related to light emission production
・ Second electrical component: Electrical component (circuit component or device) related to moving body production
・ First power supply line: Power supply line PLp
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLr or PLq
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
-Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 520 or 521

In such (configuration G4-1), the power supply system is separated by the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the upstream board, via the power supply separation / protection circuit 520 or the power supply separation / protection circuit 521. .. For example, the power supply line PLp and the power supply line PLr (or PLq) are separated. Then, only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the power supply line PLp is output to the relay board 550 (and the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit) on the downstream side.
That is, while the necessary power supply system is formed in the substrate, the power supply voltage of one system is supplied to the second substrate on the downstream side. This makes it possible to simplify the wiring between the substrates (for example, transmission lines H9 and H10).

This configuration is very advantageous, especially when the substrates are arranged apart from each other. As shown in FIG. 8, the front frame LED connection board 500, the relay board 550, and the side unit upper right LED board 600 are separated from each other due to the relationship between the lower left and upper right of the gaming machine 1, and the transmission line H9 must be long. No. In such a case, it is useful to be able to reduce the number of power supply systems.

By the way, the second substrate in this (configuration G4-1) can be considered as a button LED connection substrate 640. This is an example of sending the second power supply voltage to the second substrate.
In this case, the front frame LED connection board 500 outputs only the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) of the power supply line PLr to the button LED connection board 640 on the downstream side.
That is, also in this case, the power supply voltage of one system is supplied to the second substrate on the downstream side, so that the wiring between the substrates (for example, the transmission line H15) can be simplified.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-2) in addition to the above (configuration G4-1).
(Structure G4-2)
In the second board, one of the power supply voltages supplied from the first board is separated into a plurality of power supply lines via a protection circuit.

The second substrate of this (configuration G4-2) corresponds to the side unit upper right LED substrate 600.
The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit inputs a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) from the front frame LED connection board 500, which is the first board, and has a plurality of power supply lines PLa, PLb, PLc via the power supply separation / protection circuits 670 and 671. It is separated into.

That is, even if one power supply system is used in the transmission lines H9 and H10, if the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) or 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is required on the downstream side, the power supply is branched on the board on the downstream side. ing.
As a result, it is possible to supply only one power supply system on the transmission lines H9 and H10 regardless of the configuration on the downstream side.
This is useful when the component (side unit 10 in this example) that can be replaced for each model has a substrate on the downstream side. There are some models of the side unit 10 that are provided with a motor and some that are not provided with a motor, but of course, a model without a motor does not require a power supply for the motor. Considering this, the transmission lines H9 and H10 need only transmit the power supply of one system, but the model with a motor cannot handle it. Therefore, in the case of a model having a motor, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are separated as necessary on the second board (side unit upper right LED board 600) side as well.
In other words, the transmission lines H9 and H10 can be simplified by separating the power supply voltage of the same type as the power supply voltage separated by the first board (front frame LED connection board 500) also on the second board.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G4-3) in addition to the above (configuration G4-1) or (configuration G4-2).
(Structure G4-3)
The second substrate is provided with a power supply line for driving a motor separated from the one power supply voltage supplied from the first substrate via a protection circuit.

The second substrate of this (configuration G4-3) corresponds to the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit, and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) of the power supply line PLc is separated via the power supply separation / protection circuit 670.
When the motor drive voltage (MOT) is obtained, the backflow is prevented by the power supply separation / protection circuit 670, so that the influence of power supply noise or the like due to the motor drive can be prevented from affecting other power supply systems.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-1).
(Structure G5-1)
The game machine 1 has a first electric component related to the first effect, a second electric component related to the second effect, and a first board, and the first board is input from an external board. A first power supply line that supplies a predetermined level of power supply voltage to the first electric component as a first power supply voltage, and a second power supply line that supplies the power supply voltage to the second electric component as a second power supply voltage. Is formed, the first power supply line and the second power supply line are separated via a protection circuit, and both the first power supply voltage and the second power supply voltage are transferred from the first board to the second board. It is output.

In the case of this (configuration G5-1), the corresponding example (specific example 13) is assumed as follows. The first and second effects include any one of light emission effect by LED, movable body effect by motor / solenoid, image display effect on liquid crystal panel, vibration effect, blower effect, sound effect, and the like. In the following example, the first effect is a light emitting effect and the second effect is a movable body effect.

(Specific Example 13)
・ First board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Second board: LED board 620 at the lower right of the side unit
・ First electrical component: Electrical component (circuit component or device) related to light emission production
・ Second electrical component: Electrical component (circuit component or device) related to moving body production
・ First power supply line: Power supply line PLa
-Second power supply line: Power supply line PLC
・ First power supply voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
-Second power supply voltage: Motor drive voltage (MOT12V)
-Protection circuit: Power supply separation / protection circuit 670

In such a case (configuration G5-1), both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) separated by the power supply separation / protection circuit 670 on the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit are applied to the lower right side of the downstream side unit. It is supplied to the LED substrate 620 (see FIG. 55).
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) power supply line PLa and a motor drive voltage (MOT12V) power supply line PLc are formed by the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, and power is supplied to the first and second electric components, respectively. Is configured to be usable in the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit on the downstream side.
As a result, it is not necessary to provide a circuit for power supply separation (power supply separation / protection circuit 670) on the lower right LED board 620 side of the side unit, and the circuit configuration on the board can be simplified.

Further, the configuration in which both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) are transmitted is an effective configuration between the substrates whose arrangement positions are relatively close to each other or between the substrates included in the same unit.
The LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit and the LED board 620 on the lower right of the side unit are boards arranged at close positions as shown in FIG. 8, and the length of the transmission line H11 is also short. Further, all of these are substrates arranged in the side unit 10, and are usually handled in units of the side unit 10. That is, even if the wiring configuration of the side unit upper right LED board 600 and the side unit lower right LED board 620 is slightly complicated or the number of lines is large, it is not a disadvantageous situation. On the contrary, the advantage of providing the power supply separation / protection circuit 670 for power supply separation only on the upper right LED board 600 side of the side unit is greater. Therefore, the plurality of separated power supply systems are transmitted downstream as they are, and the plurality of power supply systems can be used as they are on the board on the downstream side.
Further, the power supply separation / protection circuit 670 prevents the power supply noise of the motor power supply system from flowing into the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for the light emission effect, and stabilizes the LED light emission operation. The effect of stabilizing the LED light emission operation can also be obtained on the lower right LED substrate 620 side of the side unit.

It should be noted that such (configuration G5-1) is different from the above-mentioned (configuration G4-1) in the above points. An example of applying (Structure G4-1) is the front frame LED connection board 500 and the relay board 550 (and the side unit upper right LED board 600), but this is between the boards separated as described above. By doing so, it becomes more effective.
On the other hand, (Structure G5-1) can be said to be a suitable configuration between substrates that are close to each other or between substrates that are handled collectively.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-2) in addition to the above (configuration G5-1).
(Structure G5-2)
The second electric component is an electric component that consumes a larger current than the first electric component.

In the above-mentioned specific example 13, the first electric component is an electric component related to the light emission effect, and the second electric component is an electric component related to the movable body effect. In this case, the first electrical component is an LED, an LED driver, and peripheral circuit components thereof, and the second electrical component is a device such as a motor or solenoid, a motor driver, and peripheral circuit components thereof. That is, the second electric component consumes a large amount of power.
By separating the power supply system for the second electric component as the power supply line PLa, the influence on the operation of the first electric component can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration G5-3) in addition to the above (configuration G5-1) or (configuration G5-2).
(Structure G5-3)
The second substrate also has the first electric component and the second electric component.

The lower right LED board 620 of the side unit corresponding to the second board has an LED light emitting unit 622 and an LED driver 621 corresponding to the first electric component (see FIG. 31). It also has a connector CN1F that corresponds to the second electrical component. The connector CN1F in this case constitutes a circuit for the lower right movable object motor 103 of the side unit.
As described above, the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit is a board in which both the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) and the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) are used, and these transmissions are suitable.

By the way, the configurations described above (configuration G1-1) to (configuration G5-3) also have an aspect of dividing the power supply system according to the application.
For example, the LED substrate 600 on the upper right of the side unit uses the supplied 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for both the LED light emission drive and the motor drive.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 29, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and the 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB). The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are prevented from affecting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the diode D7E and the Schottky barrier diode D8E.

The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) and 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) are used in the motor drivers 608 and 609 of FIG. 28.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the LED driver 605 uses a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) to drive the light emitting unit 612 to emit light.
As described above, the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is the power supply voltage for the LED and the LED driver.
The 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is the power supply voltage for driving the motor.
The 12V DC voltage (DC12VS) is the power supply voltage for the motor driver.
By separating the 12V power supply system according to the application as described above, mutual influence is avoided. For example, conventionally, by using the LED power supply voltage as it is for the motor driver, the motor driver may break down. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, the power supply system is divided according to the application.

In addition, the number of lines for the power supply voltage on the transmission line H10 is reduced while stabilizing the LED light emission so that the LED light emission is not affected even when a large current is instantaneously consumed by the motor drive of the movable body accessory. I am trying to do it.

[6.8 Number of power supply lines and number of ground lines]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-1).
(Structure H1-1)
The game machine 1 has a first board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the effect device and an output side connector, a second board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the effect device and an input side connector, and an output. It has a wiring for electrically connecting the side connector and the input side connector, and each of the connectors and the wiring includes a power supply terminal of the first system and a power supply terminal of a second system different from the first system. , The ground terminal and the drive signal terminal are included, and the number of power supply terminals of the first system is N, the number of power supply terminals of the second system is M, and the number of ground terminals is L. , N + M> L.

In this (configuration H1-1), a corresponding example (specific example 14) is assumed as follows.
(Specific Example 14)
・ First board: LED connection board 700
-Second board: Relay board 800 under the back of the board
-Output side connector: Connector CN11J (see Fig. 40)
-Input side connector: Connector CN1Q (see Fig. 46)
-Wiring: Transmission line H30
・ Power supply terminal of 1st system: 4th pin, 6th pin (number N = 2)
-Power supply terminal of the 2nd system: 7th pin, 9th pin (number M = 2)
・ Ground terminal: 1st pin, 15th pin, 16th pin (number L = 3)
-Circuit related to drive control of the production device: Electrical components, wiring, etc. constituting the LED drive circuit system from the LED connection board 700 to the decorative board 820.

In such (configuration H1-1), the number of ground lines (number of terminals) is smaller than the number of power supply lines (number of terminals) according to the current consumption on the downstream side.
FIG. 58 shows the transmission of the LED connection board 700, the underboard relay board 800, and the power supply system to the downstream side thereof.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN11J of the LED connection board 700 to the connector CN1Q of the underboard relay board 800 on two lines as the power supply voltage of the first system, and 2 as the power supply voltage of the second system. The motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted on the book line. The number of ground lines is three.

Downstream from the underboard relay board 800, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted to the decorative board 820 by six lines by the connector CN3Q and the transmission line H31.
Further, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is transmitted from the connector CN2Q to the movable object motor 830.
Further, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is transmitted from the connector CN4Q to the position detection switch 831.

Here, consider the transmission line H30 and the connectors CN11J and CN1Q at both ends thereof.
As a basic design, when the number of lines for the power supply is four, the number of grounds is also four, whereas the number of lines for the ground is three as shown in the figure.
This is because a plurality of types of power supply voltages are supplied in a number that satisfies each current consumption, but the number of grounds may be the total number of current consumption.
The under-board relay board 800, the LED connection board 700, and the like are made of a board having a laminated structure of a plurality of layers, and also have a layer in which a ground is commonly formed as a so-called solid land, in which a conductor is solidly coated over a wide area. .. Then, the plurality of pins assigned to the ground in the connector CN11J and the connector CN1Q are connected to the common ground in the substrate. Therefore, one pin and a line assigned to the ground are not dedicated to each power supply. With other substrates, unless otherwise specified, a form in which the ground pin of such a connector and the common ground are connected can be assumed.

It is assumed that one line can handle 1A (ampere).
Here, consider the maximum current consumption on the downstream side. In this case, it is the sum of the maximum current amount used in the decorative substrate 820, the maximum current amount used in the movable object motor 830, and the maximum current amount used in the position detection switch 831.
For example, the sum of the current consumption of the decorative substrate 820 of the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) system and the position detection switch 831 is 1.3A, and the current consumption of the movable motor 830 of the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) system is 1.6A. Then, each power supply system requires two lines each. For this reason, the number is 4 with 2 each.
However, in this case, since the total amount of the ground is 2.9 A, the number of lines for the ground may be three.

That is, in the LED connection board 700, the transmission line H30, and the underboard relay board 800, two types of power supply voltages are set to four by setting the number of lines according to the current consumption of each, while the ground is set to four. The number of lines is set based on the total maximum current consumption to make three lines.
This means that the number of lines required for power supply is reduced.
In addition, the number of wires between boards is reduced, and the number of terminals of the connector CN is reduced to realize cost reduction and space saving.

In the above (configuration H1-1), a corresponding example (specific example 15) is also assumed as follows.
(Specific Example 15)
・ First board: Inner frame LED relay board 400
-Second board: Front frame LED connection board 500
-Output side connector: Connector CN2B (see Fig. 13)
-Input side connector: Connector CN2C (see Fig. 15)
-Wiring: Transmission line H8
-Power supply terminal of the first system: 27th pin, 28th pin, 29th pin, 30th pin (number N = 4)
-Power supply terminal of the 2nd system: 1st pin, 3rd pin (number M = 2)
-Grand terminal: 5th pin, 7th pin, 8th pin, 17th pin, 18th pin (number L = 5)
-Circuit related to drive control of the effect device: Electrical components, wiring, etc. constituting the LED drive circuit system from the inner frame LED relay board 400 to the front frame LED connection board 500.

In this case as well, by knowing the current consumption on the downstream side, the number of power supply lines (number of terminals) including the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the first system and the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) of the second system is six. However, the configuration is such that the number of ground lines (number of terminals) is as small as five.

That is, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, the transmission line H8, and the front frame LED connection board 500, the two types of power supply voltages are set to 6 by setting the number of lines according to the respective current consumption, while the ground is used. Is set to 5 by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum current consumption.
This means that the number of lines required for power supply is reduced.
In addition, the number of wires between boards is reduced, and the number of terminals of the connector CN is reduced to realize cost reduction and space saving.
Further, in this case, the transmission line H8 constitutes the wiring of the inner frame 2 and the door 6 as shown in FIG. 5, and is a wiring that moves with the opening and closing of the door 6 and is exposed. Therefore, the effect of reducing the number of lines is great.
Further, the opening / closing portion of the door 6 is likely to be restricted in arrangement and height of parts according to the operation. Therefore, the connectors CN2B and CN2C are both desirable parts to be miniaturized, but it is extremely effective in design that the number of terminals of the connectors CN2B and CN2C can be reduced.

By the way, considering the following (Specific Example 16), it is provided with three power supply systems.
(Specific Example 16)
・ First board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Second board: LED board 620 at the lower right of the side unit
-Output side connector: Connector CN3E (see Fig. 26)
-Input side connector: Connector CN3F (see Fig. 30)
-Wiring: Transmission line H11
-Power supply terminal of the first system (DC12VB): 11th pin (number = 1)
-Power supply terminal of the 2nd system (MOT12V): 15th pin (number = 1)
-Power supply terminal of the 3rd system (DC5V): 1st pin (number = 1)
・ Ground terminal: 8th pin, 13th pin (number = 2)

The same concept as described above is also applied to the lower right LED substrate 620 of the side unit in FIG. 30, which includes three types of power supply voltages (5V DC voltage (DC5VB), 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), and motor drive voltage (MOT12V). )) The number of lines used is three, and the number of lines for ground is two. This also has the effect of reducing the number of tracks.

Therefore, the technique realized in the specific examples 14 and 15 has the wiring for electrically connecting the first board, the second board, the output side connector and the input side connector in (Structure H1-1), and then. It can be said that each of the connectors and the wiring satisfies the relationship of X> L when the number of all power supply terminals of the plurality of systems is X and the number of ground terminals is L.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-2) in addition to the above (configuration H1-1).
(Structure H1-2)
The number of ground terminals is the smallest of the integers larger than the sum of the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the first system and the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the second system divided by the rated current value of the connector terminals. It is the number of values.

That is, according to the specific example 14, the sum of the maximum current consumption of each system is 2.9 A, and the rated current value of the connector terminal is 1 A, so 2.9 ÷ 1 = 2.9, and the number of ground terminals. Is the minimum number of integers larger than that, which is "3".
This is the configuration with the highest wiring efficiency.
The same can be considered for the case of Specific Example 15.

Even when the power supplies of the first, second, and third systems are provided as in Specific Example 16, the number of ground terminals is obtained by dividing the sum of the maximum current consumption of the power supplies of each system by the rated current value of the connector terminals. Wiring efficiency is maximized by setting the number to the minimum value among integers larger than the number.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-3) together with the above (configuration H1-1) or (configuration H1-2).
(Structure H1-3)
The power supply of the first system and the power supply of the second system are separated in the first substrate via a protection circuit.

In the case of Specific Example 14, as shown in FIG. 36, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) by the power supply separation / protection circuit 790. As a result, the 12V motor drive voltage (MOT12V) is separated as the power supply voltage with overvoltage protection and backflow prevention. Therefore, the LED light emitting circuit system in the LED connection board 700, the underboard relay board 800, and the decorative board 820 is separated from power supply noise and the like due to the motor drive voltage system, and stable light emitting operation is performed.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H1-4) in the above (configuration H1-3).
(Structure H1-4)
The protection circuit is configured by using a Schottky barrier diode.

The power supply separation / protection circuit 790 described above uses a Schottky barrier diode D5J. Since the Schottky barrier diode has a small forward voltage drop, the motor drive voltage (MOT12V) can be efficiently extracted from the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which makes it suitable as a motor power source that consumes a relatively large current.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H2-1).
(Structure H2-1)
The game machine 1 has a first board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the effect device and an output side connector, a second board provided with a circuit related to drive control of the effect device and an input side connector, and an output. It has a wiring for electrically connecting the side connector and the input side connector, and each of the connectors and the wiring has a power supply terminal of the first system and a power supply terminal of a second system different from the first system. , The ground terminal and the drive signal terminal are included, and the number of power supply terminals of the first system is N, the number of power supply terminals of the second system is M, and the number of ground terminals is L. , N + M> L, and the voltage of the power supply of the first system and the power supply of the second system are different.

The above-mentioned (Specific Example 15) corresponds to such (Structure H2-1).
That is, in the inner frame LED relay board 400, the transmission line H8, and the front frame LED connection board 500, there are two types of voltages, which are the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) of the first system and the 5V DC voltage (DC5VB) of the second system. The power supply voltage is set to 6 by setting the number of lines according to each current consumption, while the ground is set to 5 by setting the number of lines based on the total maximum current consumption.
As a result, the number of lines required for power supply is reduced, the number of wirings between boards is reduced, and the number of terminals of the connector CN is reduced, thereby realizing cost reduction and space saving. As described above, since the transmission line H8 constitutes the wiring of the inner frame 2 and the door 6, there is movement accompanying the opening and closing of the door 6, and the wiring is exposed, these effects are extremely effective in design. It also leads to operational stability.
In particular, since two types of power supply systems having different voltages are transmitted, an increase in the number of lines is unavoidable to some extent, but it is significant that the number of ground lines can be reduced to reduce the total number of lines and the number of terminals.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration H2-2) in addition to the above (configuration H2-1).
(Structure H2-2)
The number of ground terminals is the smallest of the integers larger than the sum of the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the first system and the maximum current consumption of the power supply of the second system divided by the rated current value of the connector terminals. It is the number of values.

That is, according to the specific example 15, if the sum of the maximum current consumption of the first system and the second system is, for example, 4.8 A, and the rated current value of the connector terminal is 1 A, 4.8 ÷ 1 = 4.8. The number of ground terminals is set to "5", which is the minimum number of integers larger than that. This is the configuration with the highest wiring efficiency.

[6.9 Buffer and signal branching]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J1). FIG. 59 shows the configuration of the “board” of this (configuration J1).
(Structure J1)
The game machine 1 has a first electric component EP related to the first effect, and also includes a first board that relays the effect control signal to another board, and the first board has the input effect control signal. The first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing and supplies it to the first electric component EP and the effect control signal that is output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electric component EP are branched and input to perform buffer processing. It has a second buffer circuit BF2 which is used as an effect control signal to be supplied to another substrate.

In this (configuration J1), the corresponding example (concrete example 17) is assumed as follows.
(Specific example 17)
-Production control signal: Clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A)
・ First board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Other boards: LED board 630 on the side unit
First electrical component EP: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, etc. (see FIG. 27)
First buffer circuit BF1: Buffer circuit 601 (see FIG. 25)
Second buffer circuit BF2: Buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26)

The signal path of the effect control signal in the side unit upper right LED board 600 shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, that is, the clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), the data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), and the reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A) is simplified. Shown in 60.

The clock signal CLK_P, the data signal DATA_P, and the reset signal RESET_P input to the connector CN1E are first buffered by the buffer circuit 601 at the input stage. The clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, which are the outputs of the buffer circuit 601 are branched and supplied to the buffer circuit 604, the LED driver 605, and the LED driver 606.

The LED driver 605 drives the light emitting unit 612 to emit light based on the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A, and realizes a light emitting effect.

The buffer circuit 604 branches the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A into two systems and inputs them to different terminals. That is, it is a system of A1, A2, A3 terminals and a system of A5, A6, A7 terminals (see FIG. 26).
The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A input to the A1, A2, and A3 terminals are buffered and supplied to the connector CN2E from the Y1, Y2, and Y3 terminals, and the clock signal CLK, data signal DATA, and reset. As a signal RESET, it is supplied to the LED substrate 630 on the side unit via the transmission line H12.

The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A input to the A5, A6, and A7 terminals of the buffer circuit 604 are buffered and supplied to the connector CN3E from the Y5, Y6, and Y7 terminals, and the clock signal CLK and data are supplied. The signal DATA and the reset signal RESET are supplied to the lower right LED board 620 of the side unit via the transmission line H11.

The LED driver 606 converts the serial data clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A into parallel data, and supplies the serial data to the motor drivers 608 and 609 via the buffer circuit 607. The motor drive signals MOT1-1, MOT1-2, MOT1- / 1, and MOT1- / 2 generated by the motor drivers 608 and 609 were output from the connector CN3E and connected to the lower right LED board 620 of the downstream side unit. Realize the drive of the motor.

As can be clearly seen from FIG. 60, the above (configuration J1) includes the configuration of FIG. 59 as a specific example 17.
That is, the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit relays the effect control signal to the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit, and also drives the LED light emission itself (equipped with the LED driver 605). In this case, the effect control signal from the upstream is buffered by the buffer circuit 601 and then branched into the LED driver 605 and the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit, and further buffered by the buffer circuit 604. Supply downstream.

Therefore, the buffer circuit 601 compensates for the signal attenuation up to the input, and realizes stable operation of the LED driver 605. By compensating the signal with the buffer circuit 604 at the output stage before relaying further downstream, a stable signal can be transmitted to the downstream side as well.
In particular, in the case of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, the effect control signal is supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 with a long line length and via the relay board 550. Since the long line length on the path and the attenuation due to passing through the four connectors CN3C, CN1D, CN2D, and CN1E are relatively large, the signal compensation by the buffer circuit 601 is an appropriate process.
Further, signal compensation of the buffer circuit 604 is an appropriate process in order to perform stable signal transmission from the connector CN2E of the output stage to the LED board 630 on the side unit downstream after branching internally.

Note that FIG. 59 shows damping resistors Rd1 and Rd2. That is, the effect control signal is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.
Further, the effect control signal output from the second buffer circuit BF2 is output via the damping resistor Rd2.

In the case of the specific example 17, the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E shown in FIG. 24 correspond to the damping resistors Rd1.
Further, the damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E shown in FIG. 26 correspond to the damping resistors Rd2.

The clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 after noise reduction and suppression of overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data are performed by the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E. It is processed. As a result, signal compensation is performed while maintaining the quality of the waveform, which is preferable in that signal deterioration is suppressed.
Further, the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 604, and then the damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E reduce noise and suppress overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data. Is output after performing. This is preferable in that the waveform quality of the effect control signal transferred downstream is maintained and signal deterioration is suppressed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-1). FIG. 61 shows the configuration of the “first substrate” of this (configuration J2-1).
(Structure J2-1)
It has a first electrical component EP related to the first effect, and also includes a first board that relays an effect control signal to a plurality of other boards. The first board is an effect control input from an input side connector CNin. It has a first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing on the signal and supplies it to the first electric component EP, and the effect control signal output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electric component EP is branched and wired. A plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22, which are multiple systems of effect control signals relayed to the plurality of other boards and perform buffer processing on the plurality of systems of effect control signals, and a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21. , It has a plurality of output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 that output a plurality of effect control signals output from the BF 22 to the other boards that are different from each other.

In this (configuration J2-1), a corresponding example (concrete example 18) is assumed as follows.
(Specific Example 18)
-Input side connector CNin: Connector CN1E
-Multiple output side connectors CNout1, CNout2: Connector CN2E, CN3E
-Production control signal: Clock signal CLK_P (CLK_A), data signal DATA_P (DATA_A), reset signal RESET_P (RESET_A)
・ First board: LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit
-Multiple other boards: LED board 620 on the lower right of the side unit, LED board 630 on the upper side of the side unit
First electrical component EP: LED driver 605, light emitting unit 612, etc. (see FIG. 27)
First buffer circuit BF1: Buffer circuit 601 (see FIG. 25)
Second buffer circuit BF21, BF22: Buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26)

As can be clearly seen from FIG. 60, the specific example 18 has the configuration of FIG. 61 as the above (configuration J2-1).

That is, the LED board 600 on the upper right side of the side unit relays the effect control signal to the LED board 630 on the downstream side unit and the LED board 620 on the lower right side of the side unit, and also drives the LED light emission itself (equipped with the LED driver 605). ing).
In this case, the effect control signal from the upstream from the connector CN1E is buffered by the buffer circuit 601 and then branched into the LED driver 605 and the downstream, and further, the functions of the first and second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22. After buffering with the buffer circuit 604 including the above, the components are supplied downstream from the connectors CN2E and CN3E.

Therefore, the buffer circuit 601 compensates for the signal attenuation up to the input, and realizes stable operation of the LED driver 605. By compensating the signal with the buffer circuit 604 at the output stage before relaying further downstream, a stable signal can be transmitted to the downstream side as well. In particular, in the case of the LED board 600 on the upper right of the side unit, considering that the effect control signal is supplied from the front frame LED connection board 500 with a long line length and via the relay board 550, the long line length and the four connectors CN3C , CN1D, CN2D, CN1E, the attenuation by passing through is relatively large, so the signal compensation by the buffer circuit 601 is an appropriate process.

Furthermore, after branching internally, the effect control signal is branched to a plurality of downstream boards, and stable signal transmission is transmitted from the output stage connectors CN2E and CN3E to the downstream side unit upper LED board 630 and side unit lower right LED board 620. The signal compensation of the buffer circuit 604 is an appropriate process for this purpose.

Further, in the buffer circuit 601, by buffering at the stage of the common effect control signal before branching, it is efficient to compensate for the attenuation in the transmission line up to that point, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the circuit configuration. There is also an aspect.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-2) in addition to the above (configuration J2-1).
(Structure J2-2)
The effect control signal input from the input side connector CNin is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.

In the case of the specific example 18, the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E shown in FIG. 24 correspond to the damping resistors Rd1.
The clock signal CLK_P, data signal DATA_P, and reset signal RESET_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 601 after noise reduction and suppression of overshoot and undershoot in the waveform as serial data are performed by the damping resistors R9E, R11E, and R12E. It is processed. As a result, signal compensation is performed while maintaining the quality of the waveform, which is preferable in that signal deterioration is suppressed.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J2-3) in addition to the above (configuration J2-1) (configuration J2-2).
(Structure J2-3)
The effect control signals output from the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are supplied to the output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 via the damping resistors Rd2 and Rd3.

In the case of the specific example 18, the damping resistors R18E, R19E, and R20E shown in FIG. 26 correspond to the damping resistors Rd2, and the damping resistors R24E, R25E, and R26E correspond to the damping resistors Rd3.
The clock signal CLK_A, data signal DATA_A, and reset signal RESET_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 604, and then the damping resistors R18E, R19E, R20E, R24E, R25E, and R26E reduce noise and overshoot the waveform as serial data. , It is output from the connectors CN2E and CN3E after suppressing the undershoot. This is preferable in that the waveform quality of the effect control signal transferred downstream is maintained and signal deterioration is suppressed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-1). FIG. 62 shows the configuration of the “first substrate” of this (configuration J3-1).
(Structure J3-1)
It has a first electric component EP related to the first effect, and also includes a first board that relays an effect control signal to a plurality of other boards. The first board is an effect control input from an input side connector CNin. It has a first buffer circuit BF1 that performs buffer processing on the signal and supplies it to the first electric component EP, and the effect control signal output from the first buffer circuit BF1 and supplied to the first electric component EP is branched and wired. A plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22, which are multiple systems of effect control signals relayed to the plurality of other boards and perform buffer processing on the plurality of systems of effect control signals, and a plurality of second buffer circuits BF21. , The plurality of output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 that output a plurality of effect control signals output from the BF22 to the other boards that are different from each other, and the plurality of second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are of the plurality of systems. It is formed by a one-chip circuit in which an effect control signal is input by another terminal, buffered, and output from another terminal.

In this (configuration J3-1), the above-mentioned (Specific Example 18) is assumed, and the buffer circuit 604 (see FIG. 26) is a one-chip circuit having functions as the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22.
As a result, the same effect as the above (configuration J2-1) can be obtained, and by further adopting the one-chip configuration, it is possible to reduce the substrate area, facilitate the layout design, and the like.
Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the buffer circuit 604 branches the clock signal CLK_A, the data signal DATA_A, and the reset signal RESET_A into two systems, and has A1, A2, A3 terminal systems and A5, A6, A7 terminals. The system is branched. That is, the input terminal of the chip is effectively used to branch into two systems, and the effect control signal of each system is buffered. As a result, the configuration for branching can be simplified, and signal compensation is appropriately performed in each system.

In the buffer circuit 761 of FIG. 44, the clock signal CLK_C and the data signal DATA_C are buffered and then transmitted to the connectors CN2M and CN3M on the downstream side). This is also an example of branching into two systems using the input terminal of the buffer circuit 604.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-2) in addition to the above (configuration J3-1).
(Structure J3-2)
The effect control signal input from the input side connector CNin is input to the first buffer circuit BF1 via the damping resistor Rd1.
As a result, the same effect as that of (Structure J2-2) described above can be obtained.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration J3-3) in addition to the above (configuration J3-1) (configuration J3-2).
(Structure J3-3)
The effect control signals output from the second buffer circuits BF21 and BF22 are supplied to the output side connectors CNout1 and CNout2 via the damping resistors Rd2 and Rd3.
As a result, the same effect as that of (Structure J2-3) described above can be obtained.

[6.10 Power supply by electrical parts]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-1).
(Structure K1-1)
The game machine 1 has a substrate provided with a first electric component and a second electric component related to the first effect, and the first electric component operates using the first voltage as a power supply voltage and is derived from the first voltage. The second electric component is provided with a terminal for outputting a low second voltage, and is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage.

In this (configuration K1-1), a corresponding example (concrete example 19) is assumed as follows. Each component of Specific Example 14 will be described with reference to FIG.
(Specific Example 19)
-Board: LED board 780A
・ First electrical component: LED driver 782
-Second electrical component: Buffer circuit 781
・ First voltage: 12V DC voltage (DC12VB)
・ Second voltage: 5V reference voltage Vref
-Terminal that outputs the second voltage: Terminal VREF

FIG. 63 shows the configuration of the LED substrate 780A. The LED substrate 780A is a modification of the LED substrate 780 shown in FIG. 45.
In this case, the connector CN1N'has a 4-terminal configuration from the 1st pin to the 4th pin as the numbers "1" to "4" are attached, and the terminal assignment is 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) for the 1st pin. ), The second pin is the clock signal CLK terminal, the third pin is the data signal DATA terminal, and the fourth pin is the ground terminal.
Needless to say, the terminal configuration of the board on the upstream side is also changed accordingly.

As can be seen in comparison with FIG. 45, in the case of FIG. 63, a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. However, the buffer circuit 781 having a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) as the power supply voltage is mounted in the same manner as in FIG. 45.

The LED driver 782 uses a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as the power supply voltage, but the terminal VREF is configured to output a reference voltage Vref of 5V. The reference voltage Vref is used to set the LED driver 782, and in this case, it is applied to the terminal CTLSCT, the terminal RESET, the terminal A0, and the terminal A1.

The terminal CTLSCT is a serial bus communication setting terminal, and it is selected whether to set a 3-wire serial bus signal as an input signal or a 2-wire serial bus signal as an input signal depending on the terminal voltage (L / H).
The terminal RESET is a reset signal input terminal and is reset at the L level.
Terminals A0, A1, A2, A3, and A4 are slave address setting terminals, and the 5-bit slave address of the LED driver 782 itself is set. In the case of this LED driver 782, for example, the reference voltage Vref is applied to the terminals A0 and A1, and the terminals A2, A3 and A4 are connected to the ground, so that the slave address "11000" is set.

Then, in the case of FIG. 63, this reference voltage Vref is used as the power supply voltage of the buffer circuit 781.
Therefore, the efficiency of the power supply configuration is realized, and the input of a plurality of power supply voltage systems is not required. Since it is not necessary to input a 5V DC voltage (DC5V), the connector CN1N'on the input side can be simplified.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-2) in addition to the above (configuration K1-1).
(Structure K1-2)
The first electrical component is an LED driver, and a first voltage is used to drive the LED.

In the specific example 19, the first electric component is the LED driver 782, but the LED driver 782 drives the LED of the light emitting unit 783 to emit light. A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which is the first voltage, is used to drive the LED of the light emitting unit 783.
As a result, the LED substrate 780A of FIG. 63 can operate the LED driver 782, the light emitting unit 783, and the buffer circuit 781 only by inputting the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB), which improves the efficiency of the power supply configuration. It becomes suitable.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-3) together with the above (configuration K1-1) and (configuration K1-2).
(Structure K1-3)
The first voltage is supplied to the substrate from another substrate, and the second voltage is not supplied to the substrate.

As described in the description of the connector CN1N'in FIG. 63, only the 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is supplied from the upstream substrate, and the 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is not supplied. This is a configuration that can simplify the power supply wiring.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K1-4) together with the above (configuration K1-1) (configuration K1-2) (configuration K1-3).
(Structure K1-4)
The first electric component is a driver circuit of the effect device, and is one of a plurality of driver circuits in which different slave addresses are set. The first electric component sets the second voltage to its own slave address setting. I am using it.

The LED driver 782, which is the first electric component, is configured to apply the reference voltage Vref, which is the second voltage, to the terminals A1 and A2 for setting the slave address. In other words, the voltage used for addressing the LED driver 782 is used as the power supply voltage in the buffer circuit 781. This is a configuration that promotes the efficiency of the power supply configuration.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K2).
(Structure K2)
The game machine 1 has a substrate provided with a first electric component and a second electric component related to the first effect, and the first electric component operates using the first voltage as a power supply voltage and is derived from the first voltage. The second electric component is provided with a terminal for outputting a low second voltage, and the second electric component is configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage. 2 The electric component is a buffer circuit that performs buffer processing on an effect control signal output to another board.

The above-mentioned specific example 19 corresponds to this (configuration K2).
The LED substrate 780A of FIG. 63 has a role as a relay substrate for the downstream LED substrate 790 and a role as a substrate for driving the LED light emission. In such a case, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used to drive the LED driver 782 and the light emitting unit 783 to emit light, and the reference voltage Vref as the second voltage is used as a buffer circuit for signal compensation of the effect control signal downstream. Used in 781. As a result, the power supply configuration can be simplified with a board having both functions of a relay board for the effect control signal and a drive board for the effect.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has the following (configuration K3).
(Structure K3)
The game machine 1 includes a first electric component to which an effect control signal supplied from another board is input, a second electric component to which the effect control signal is branched and input in parallel with the first electric component. The first electric component operates with the first voltage as the power supply voltage and has a terminal for outputting a second voltage lower than the first voltage, and the second electric component is the second electric component. It is configured to operate with two voltages as the power supply voltage.

The above-mentioned specific example 19 corresponds to this (configuration K3).
The LED substrate 780A of FIG. 63 is a substrate that branches the input effect control signal, that is, the clock signal and the data signal DATA, supplies the LED driver 782, and transmits the clock signal and the data signal DATA downstream via the buffer circuit 781. In this case, a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used to drive the LED driver 782, and a reference voltage Vref as the second voltage is used in the buffer circuit 781 for signal compensation of the effect control signal downstream. This makes it possible to simplify the power supply configuration on the board that branches the effect control signal and processes it in parallel.

[6.11 Others]
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment further has the following various configurations.

(Configuration Z1)
The LED board 780 of FIG. 45 receives a 5V DC voltage (DC5V) and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) as power supply voltages from the upstream relay board 760 by the connector CN1N.
A 5V DC voltage (DC5V) is used as the power supply for the buffer circuit 781, and a 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is used as the power supply for the LED driver 782.
A 12V DC voltage (DC12VB) is output from the connector CN2N to the LED substrate 790 (see FIG. 11) on the downstream side.
As a result, the efficiency of power supply can be improved.

(Configuration Z2)
The inner frame LED relay board 400 of FIG. 13 outputs a signal for effect control from the effect control board 30 to each board of the door 6, but also includes a signal for the speaker 46.

In this case, the signals for effect control are clock signal S_IN_CLK, load signal S_IN_LOAD, serial data signal S_IN_DATA, clear signal CLR_L, clear signal CLR_M, clock signal CLK_L, clock signal CLK_M, data signal DATA_L, data signal DATA_M, general purpose. Output port, enable signal ENABLE_M.

The signal to the speaker 46 is a signal of the + terminal and the-terminal for each of the upper right speaker, the right middle speaker, the lower right speaker, the upper left speaker, and the left middle speaker of the 19th to 26th pins of the connector CN1B.
Pins 19 to 26 of the connector CN2B are also signals for the speaker.

Here, pins 17 and 18 are grounded for both the connectors CN1B and CN2B.
As a result, in the system of the transmission line H7, the connector CN1B, the connector CN2B, and the transmission line H8, a ground is provided between the speaker signal, that is, the audio signal, and the above signal for effect control, that is, the high frequency signal. It will be.
As a result, the shielding effect can be obtained, and the influence of high-frequency noise generated by the high-frequency signal for effect control on the audio signal can be reduced.
Moreover, this makes it possible to transmit the signal for effect control and the speaker signal with the same wiring, which improves the wiring efficiency.

(Configuration Z3)
The harness connected to the movable body often uses a flexible cable that is hard to break even if it is repeatedly moved, or a wire that is softer than usual.
Compared to ordinary wire rods, soft wire rods are characterized by high durability, high price, and almost the same current that can be passed. On the other hand, flexible cables are characterized by high price and low current that can be passed.
Due to the structure of the movable body, the harness has a large amount of deflection, and a flexible cable is used when you want to control the direction of the deflection. This is because it is difficult to control the bending of a soft wire rod.

(Configuration Z4)
The connectors CN1C and CN4C of FIG. 16 will be described.
Downstream of the front frame LED connection board 500, there are two LED boards (an LED board (not shown) and an LED board in the handle) connected to the connectors CN1C and CN4C. In this case, one of the two LED substrates is equipped with an LED driver. As described above, the front frame LED connection board 500 transmits a signal for LED control from the connector CN1C to the LED driver of one LED board, and the LED light emission drive current (17-R6, 17-) from the LED driver. G6, 17-B6, 17-R7, 17-G7, 17B-7) are received and transmitted from the connector CN4C to the other LED board.

That is, when there are two LED boards (second and third boards) downstream of the first board (front frame LED connection board 500) and the LED driver is mounted on one of them (second board), the first The drive control signal is transmitted from one board 500, a part of the LED drive signal is returned from the LED driver of the second board, relayed, and sent to the other LED board (third board).

As a result, only one LED driver is required to drive the second and third substrates, and simplification of the configuration and miniaturization of the downstream LED substrate can be promoted.
Further, since the light emission is controlled by a common control signal, it is sufficient to send the drive control signal only from the first substrate to the second substrate, and the wiring efficiency is good.
Further, by relaying on the first substrate, a harness between the second substrate and the third substrate becomes unnecessary.

(Configuration Z5)
As shown in FIGS. 36, 39, 40, and 41, in the LED connection board 700, the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK (clock signal CLK_P) and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA (serial data signal) transmitted from the effect control board 30 DATA_P) is transferred to the downstream side via the buffer circuit 703 and the buffer circuit (any of 705, 706, 707, 708).

That is, the clock signal CLK_P and the serial data signal DATA_P are buffered by the buffer circuit 703, and become the clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 706 of FIG. 40 and output from the connector CN7J as the clock signal CLK_E and the serial data signal DATA_E.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 705 of FIG. 39 and output from the connector CN10J as the clock signal CLK_B and the serial data signal DATA_B.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 707 of FIG. 41 and output from the connector CN9J as the clock signal CLK_D and the serial data signal DATA_D.
The clock signal CLK_A and the serial data signal DATA_A are buffered by the buffer circuit 708 of FIG. 41 and output from the connector CN8J as the clock signal CLK_C and the serial data signal DATA_C.

In this way, the clock signal P_S_OUT_CLK and the serial data signal P_S_OUT_DATA are first buffered in the reception stage, then branched into four systems, buffered in the output stage of each system, and output.
When the input signal is branched into a plurality of systems and output in this way, stable signal transmission is realized by buffering the input stage and each output stage of the plurality of systems.

Although the embodiments have been described above, each configuration example from (configuration A1-1) to (configuration Z5) can be combined in various ways, and the effects described in each configuration can be obtained by arbitrarily combining them. It can be a gaming machine 1 that also has a combination.
In addition to that, it is also possible to combine the configurations and operations described in the embodiments.
Further, the specific examples illustrated in various ways are only one aspect of realizing each configuration. Various specific examples that are not specified are also conceivable.

Further, although the embodiment has been described with the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention can also be applied to a rotating cylinder type gaming machine such as a so-called slot gaming machine.
The rotating body type gaming machine also has a frame member, a door member that can be opened and closed with respect to the frame member, and an exchange member that is exchangeably attached to the frame member.
For example, a rotating body type gaming machine will have a frame housing as a configuration corresponding to a frame member, a door as a configuration corresponding to a door member, and a reel unit as a configuration corresponding to a replacement member. For example, the frame housing constitutes the main body of the rotating body type gaming machine, and the reel unit is attached to the frame housing directly or via sheet metal or the like by screwing, so that the reel unit can be replaced. The door is attached to the frame housing so that it can be opened and closed.
Even in such a rotating machine, the board configuration, circuit configuration, connector configuration, power supply configuration, and the like as described in each embodiment can be adopted.

1 Game machine 2 Inner frame 3 Game board 4 Outer frame 6 Door 10 Side unit 13 Direction button 15a Cross key 15b Enter button 20 Main control board 30 Production control board 300 Power supply board 400 Inner frame LED relay board 500 Front frame LED connection board 501 , 502,503,504,507,508,512,513,601,604,607,703,704,705,706,707,708,741,761,781 Buffer circuit 505,506,602,603,701 702 P / S conversion circuit 509,605,606,621,631,661,663,742,782 LED driver 510,511,608,609,710,711,712,713,714,715,716 Motor driver 520, 521,670,671,790 Power supply separation / protection circuit 550 Relay board 600 Side unit upper right LED board 620 Side unit lower right LED board 630 Side unit upper LED board 640 Button LED connection board 660 Button LED board 700 LED connection board 720 Back of board Left relay board 740 Decorative board 760 Relay board 780, 780', 790 LED board 800 Board back bottom relay board 820 Decorative board 840 Frame LED relay board

Claims (1)

The first electric component to which the effect control signal supplied from another board is input, and
A second electric component to which the effect control signal is branched and input in parallel with the first electric component,
Has a substrate provided with
The first electric component operates using the first voltage as a power supply voltage and includes a terminal that outputs a second voltage lower than the first voltage.
The second electric component is a gaming machine configured to operate using the second voltage as a power supply voltage.

Images